Panasonic DP-3530 Service Manual Download | Manualshive

Page: 752 / 858

background image

752

JAN 2006

Ver. 5.2

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

11.3.2.5.3. Paper Feed System

1. Outline

The paper feed system feeds a stack of sheets (coming from the Finisher) to the position where the
center of the paper stack (stitching position) is aligned to the stapler's staple, allowing the next step
(stitching and folding) to be performed.

When sheets of paper have been stacked and aligned on the Processing Tray, the Paddle Motor (M2)
rotates in the reverse direction, causing the Swing Guide to descend. As the Swing Guide descends,
the paper stack is sandwiched between the Upper and Lower Stack Delivery Rollers. The Delivery
Motor (M3) rotates in the reverse direction, feeding the paper stack toward the Saddle Unit. When the
leading edge of the paper stack reaches the Folding Position Sensor (PI10), the Finisher Controller
PCB drives the Delivery Motor a specified number of motor pulses to stop the center of the paper stack
(stitching position) at the stapler's staple position. Before the paper stack passes through the Stack
Feed Rollers, the Feed Motor (M1) is driven to rotate the Stack Feed Roller (lower) so that the leading
edge of the paper stack is not bent.

Fig. 2-041

Paper stack

Fold Position Sensor

Stack Feed Roller (Lower)

Stack Delivery Roller

(Lower)

Stack Delivery Roller (Upper)

«
...
750
751
752
753
754
...
»

Summary of Contents for DP-3530

Page 1: ... advise non technical individuals of potential dangers in attempting to service a product Products powered by electricity should be serviced or repaired only by experienced professional technicians Any attempt to service or repair the product or products dealt within this service information by anyone else could result in serious injury or death WARNING 2006 Panasonic Communications Co Ltd All rig...

Page 2: ... PCB Caution Pb free solder has a higher melting point than standard solder typically the melting point is 50 70 F 30 40 C higher Please use a soldering iron with temperature control and adjust it to 700 20 F 370 10 C Exercise care while using higher temperature soldering irons do not heat the PCB for too long to prevent solder splash or damage to the PCB Pb free solder will tend to splash when he...

Page 3: ... Note If the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed to prevent a Disk Scan Function from being performed similar to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC it is important to follow the step sequence below when turning OFF the Power Switches on the machine 1 Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position first 2 Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes ...

Page 4: ...4 Beispiel DP 6530 4530 6030 Hinweis ...

Page 5: ... a live connector can cause arcing consequently deforming the plug and cause fire When disconnecting the machine grasp the plug instead of the cord Pulling on a cord forcibly can damage it and cause fire or electric shock When the machine is not used over an extended period of time switch it Off and unplug it If an unused machine is left connected to a power source for a long period degraded insul...

Page 6: ...nauthorized modification can cause smoke or fire Consumable Safeguards Never dispose of toner toner cartridge or a waste toner container into an open flame Toner remaining in the cartridge can cause an explosion burns and or injuries Keep button batteries stamp out of the reach of children If a button battery stamp is swallowed accidentally get medical treatment immediately Installation and Reloca...

Page 7: ...ing a jammed paper that is difficult or impossible to see do not try to remove it by yourself Doing so can cause injuries or burns Switch Off the machine immediately and wait until it cools down Consumable Safeguards Never heat the drum cartridge or scratch its surface A heated or scratched drum can be hazardous to your health Do not mix new and old batteries together as they can burst or leak cau...

Page 8: ...simile 237 System Description 266 6 1 Copy Process 266 6 2 Precautions with Consumables 267 6 3 New Digital Image Control Qualitative Reasoning Based Adaptive Controller New Digital QUANTUM 269 6 4 Inverting Automatic Document Feeder i ADF 271 6 5 Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations 273 Installation 282 7 1 Precautions During Set Up 282 7 2 Unpacking 284 7 3 Installation Procedure 285 7 4 Adjustm...

Page 9: ...Unit DA SP41 403 8 32 Installing the Power Supply for Finisher DA PW600 411 8 33 Installing the Key Counter Harness Kit DZTY000128 413 8 34 Installing the Dehumidifier Heater DZTQ000041 415 8 35 Installing the Stand DA D351 D352 423 8 36 Replacing the OPC Drum 426 General Network Information 429 9 1 Network Protocol 429 9 2 Layer Functions and Technology 431 9 3 Network Layer 435 9 4 Transport Lay...

Page 10: ...Canada A4 For EU A4 For Other Destinations Paper Tray LDR LGL LTR LTR R INV R For USA and Canada A3 A4 A4 R A5 R B4 FLS For EU A3 A4 A4 R B4 B5 B5 R For Other Destinations Sheet Bypass LDR LGL LTR LTR R INV R For USA and Canada A3 A4 A4 R A5 R B4 FLS For EU A3 A4 A4 R B4 B5 B5 R For Other Destinations Sheet Bypass Envelope No 13 Warm up Time Less than 30 sec Less than 180 sec 68 F 20 C 14 First Co...

Page 11: ...ada and EU Option Yes Standard For Other Destinations Original Set Face Up Scanning Method Sheet Through Capacity Original 70 sheets LTR A4 USA and Canada LTR 20 lb 75 g m2 Other Destinations A4 80 g m2 SADF Mode Yes Available for single side scanning only Free Stop Yes From 30 to 70 degrees 20 Multi Copy Range 1 999 sets 21 Gradation Text 2 steps Text Photo 2 step error diffusion Photo 256 steps ...

Page 12: ... Detection Manual Control Panel Low Level Paper Warning Empty only Dimensions W x D x H 23 6 x 28 7 x 11 4 in 600 x 730 x 290 mm Weight 66 1 lb 30 0 kg 3000 sheets Paper Feed Module Letter 3 000 sheets Letter R 2 500 sheets Legal 1 500 sheets DA MA301 LTR LGL 20 lb 75 g m2 Paper Size Detection Manual Control Panel Low Level Paper Warning Empty only Dimensions W x D x H 11 6 x 17 5 x 19 9 in 295 x ...

Page 13: ...the Heater Power NW Function available Auto Off Mode Yes 4W For USA Canada and EU With Finisher Power Supply NW Function not available Yes 3W For Other Destinations Without Finisher Power Supply NW Function not available Remote Diagnostic Yes Requires the Fax Communication Board DA FG600 option Machine Stops while Out of Toner Yes Copier function 2 Additional Features Low Level Paper Warning Empty...

Page 14: ...ctronic Sorting Yes Rotation Sorting Yes Insertion Job Cover Mode Yes Page Insertion Mode Yes OHP Interleave Mode Yes Non copy Copy Presentation Mode Yes Department Counter Yes 300 Departments i ADF Multi Size Feed Yes LDR and LTR LGL and LTR R A3 and A4 B4 and B5 A4 R and A5 SADF Mode Yes Original Counter No Job Memory Yes 5 Job Time Display No Concurrent Copy Yes 12 Tandem Copy Mode Yes Remote C...

Page 15: ...net Fax Mode change LCD Main Indication Message Language Default English American For USA and Canada Specified Language For EU and Other Destinations Original Size Image Indication Yes with Image Paper Size Image Indication Yes with Image Paper Tray Selection Yes Selected Paper Tray Status Yes Original Mode Selection Yes Text Text Photo Photo Copy Density Selection Yes Setting Confirmation Yes Zoo...

Page 16: ... 5 Optical System Original Detection Method Reflective Photo Sensor Type Scanning Method 600 dpi CCD Dehumidifier Yes Supplied as a Service Part Part Number DZTQ000041 Mechanical Multi Copy Mode No 6 Process System Type Separate OPC Unit and Developer Unit Type Toner 24K 35K Developer Life 240K Drum Life 240K LTR A4 Toner Waste Container 240K Dehumidifier Yes Supplied as a Service Part Part Number...

Page 17: ...ste Container Yes Outer Tray Option For USA and Canada Yes For EU and Other Destinations Operating Instructions Yes Power Supply 1 Power Requirement 99 138 VAC 47 63 Hz Single phase 100 VAC Power Supply 180 264 VAC 47 63 Hz Single phase 220 VAC Power Supply 2 Power Consumption Less than 1500 W Ambient Conditions 1 Temperature 50 80 F 10 30 C 2 Relative Humidity 30 80 3 Safety UL1950 CSA C22 2 No 9...

Page 18: ...s mm Transmission Std 8 x 3 85 Fine 8 x 7 7 S Fine 8 x 15 4 16 x 15 4 600dpi 600 x 600 dpi Reception Std 8 x 3 85 Fine 8 x 7 7 S Fine 8 x 15 4 16 x 15 4 600dpi 600 x 600 dpi Scanner Mechanism 1 Scanning Device CCD i ADF Platen 2 Scanning Speed Resolution Vertical Horizontal A4 Scanned in Vertical or Horizontal Direction Std 8 x 3 85 pels mm x lines mm 1 0 sec 0 7 sec Fine 8 x 7 7 pels mm x lines m...

Page 19: ...Stack Yes Face Down 8 Consumables Toner Bottle OPC Drum and Staples Fax Memory 1 Standard Memory DP 3530 4530 6030 3 MB 180 pages DP 3510 3520 4510 4520 6010 6020 2 MB 120 pages Flash ROM ITU T Image No 1 A4 Std Resolution 2 Optional Memory 4 MB 8 MB Expansion Flash Memory Card Dual Operation 1 Multi Task Operation Yes 2 Direct XMT Reserve Yes 3 Memory XMT Reserve Yes 4 Number of Memory Job Files ...

Page 20: ...Direct Deferred Transmission No ADF Deferred Transmission 6 Deferred Transmission Yes Max 50 Timers 7 Deferred Multi Station Transmission Yes 8 Priority Direct Transmission Yes Priority ADF Transmission 9 Priority Memory Transmission No 10 Batch Transmission Yes Real Time up to 5 Files 11 90 Degree Rotation Transmission Yes 12 Cover Sheet Yes 13 Confidential Mail Box Yes 20 Mailboxes 14 Multi Copy...

Page 21: ...rary Polling Password Yes 10 Continuous Polling Yes Convenience 1 Panel Display Wide Touch Panel Display 2 Voice Contact No 3 Edit File Mode Yes With View Mode 4 Incomplete File Save Yes With View Mode 5 Automatic Cover Sheet Yes Certainty 1 Verification Stamp Yes 2 Header Total Page Print Yes 3 Transaction Journal Yes 200 Transactions with View Mode 4 Comm Journal Yes With Image Data 5 Last Ind X...

Page 22: ...r No 9 File XMT No 10 Fax Forward Yes Received File Transfer Only with Internet Fax Option 11 Sub address XMT Yes T Routing 12 Sub address RCV Yes 13 OMR XMT No Standards 1 PSTN FCC Part 68 1997 Industry Canada No CS 03 Issue 8 1996 Others 1 Fax Access Code Yes 2 PIN Code Access Yes For USA and Canada only 3 Intelligent Redial AI Yes 4 Files 4 Department Code Yes 300 Departmental Codes 5 Power Sav...

Page 23: ...cs Parallel Interface Ethernet 6 OS Win 98 Me Win NT 4 0 Win 2000 XP 7 GDI Yes 8 PDL PCL6 Yes Requires Optional PCL6 Emulation Kit 9 PDL PS3 Yes Requires Optional PS PCL6 Emulation Kit 10 Duplex Printing Yes 11 Collation Stack Yes 12 Status Monitor Local No 13 Network Printing Yes 14 Network Status Monitor Yes 15 Smoothing Yes 16 Applicable PC IBM PC AT or Compatible 17 Multi Task Operation Printi...

Page 24: ...ning Function 1 Scanning Device CCD i ADF Platen 2 Halftone 256 Halftone Shades With Error Diffusion 3 Max Document Size A3 Ledger 4 Scanning Resolution dpi 600 x 600 300 x 300 150 x 150 Selectable 600 dpi Optical Scanner 5 OS Win 98 Me Win NT 4 0 Win 2000 XP 6 2 Sided Scanning Yes With i ADF 7 File Format Mult page TIFF PDF PDF format is available for DP 3520 3530 4520 4530 6020 6030 only 8 Compl...

Page 25: ...ze Ledger A3 2 Effective Scanning Width 11 4 in 289 mm 3 Scanning Resolution pel mm x lines mm Std 203 x 98 8 x 3 85 Fine 203 x 196 8 x 7 7 S Fine 203 x 391 8 x 15 4 406 x 391 16 x 15 4 600dpi 600 x 600 dpi LAN 600 dpi 16 x 15 4 Scanning Resolution is available with Parameter setting Printer Mechanism 1 Printing Resolution 600 dpi 2 Effective Recording Width 11 4 in 289 mm Transmission Features 1 ...

Page 26: ... FAX Transmission Yes Requires Panafax Desktop Software Inbound Routing Yes Using Sub Address Local print available Address Book Registration from PC Yes Via Email 4 I Fax Parameters Registration via Email Yes 5 Internet Delivery Confirmation Yes With MDN 6 Network Scanning Yes 600 dpi 7 Network Printing LPR LPD Yes 600 dpi GDI Yes PDL Yes Requires Optional PCL6 or PS Emulation Kit 8 DHCP Client Y...

Page 27: ...n Electronic Sorting Board Automatic Duplex Unit Parallel Port Interface Printer 10 100 Ethernet Interface SPC PC Board DRV PC Board 550 Sheet Paper Tray 1 550 Sheet Paper Tray 550 Sheet x 1 Paper Tray 550 Sheet x 2 Paper Tray 2 Bin Saddle Stitch Finisher 2 Bin Finisher 1 Bin Saddle Stitch Finisher or Exit Tray Outer Inverting ADF i ADF ADF PC Board MJR KEY Counter Harness Option Dehumidifier Heat...

Page 28: ...age Memory 16 MB DA SM16B For Electronic Sorting Image Memory 64 MB DA SM64B Image Memory 128 MB DA SM28B Expansion Flash Memory Card 4 MB UE 410047 Additional Page Memory for Fax Communication Board DA FG600 Expansion Flash Memory Card 8 MB UE 410048 DD Server Software DA WS20 For DD Server Function Accounting Software DA WA10 For Accounting Function Stand DA D351 For USA and Canada only Stand Sh...

Page 29: ...estinations Please ask your sales company for details Part Name Part Number Remarks Toner DQ TU24D 24K for DP 3510 4510 DQ TU35D 35K for DP 6010 DQ TU241G 24K for DP 3520 3530 4520 4530 DQ TU351G 35K for DP 6020 6030 Staple Cartridge FQ SS32 Staple Cartridge Refills 3 for DA FS330 DQ SS35 Staple Cartridge Refills 3 for DA FS355 355A FQ SS50 Staple Cartridge Refills 3 for DA FS605 Saddle Stitch FQ ...

Page 30: ... effect at date of manufacture For USA only Front View Right View Left View Top View Rear View 10 4 in 265 mm 12 7 in 322 mm 23 6 in 600 mm 29 8 in 758 mm 35 4 in 900 mm CAUTION THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM BATTERY DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS OF YOUR LOCAL SOLID WASTE...

Page 31: ... 8 in 300 mm 11 in 280 mm 17 3 in 440 mm 29 8 in 758 mm 19 9 in 505 mm 23 6 in 600 mm 101 2 in 2570 mm 95 3 in 2420 mm Copier Finisher 3000 Sheet LCT LT R_LGL Adapter 83 3 in 2115 mm 3 9 in 100 mm 3 9 in 100 mm 3 9 in 100 mm 10 4 in 265 mm 3 9 in 100 mm 11 8 in 300 mm 29 8 in 758 mm 29 5 in 750 mm 23 6 in 600 mm 19 9 in 505 mm Copier Finisher 54 6 in 1387 mm 3 9 in 100 mm 3 9 in 100 mm 3 9 in 100 ...

Page 32: ...etters I and O For Example DP 3510 PU DP 4510 PU Production Facility Production Year Starting with Year 2001 the last 2 digits of the year is represented as A T A 01 2001 K 11 2011 B 02 L 12 C 03 M 13 D 04 N 14 E 05 O 15 F 06 P 16 G 07 Q 17 H 08 R 18 I 09 S 19 J 10 2010 T 20 2020 Production Month A January G July B February H August C March I September D April J October E May K November F June L D...

Page 33: ...33 JAN 2006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 1 6 Control Panel DP 3510 3520 4510 4520 6010 6020 DP 3530 4530 6030 PRINT DATA STATUS ACTIVE DP 6030 ...

Page 34: ...F Paper Feed Motor ADF Feed Motor Scanning Motor Corona Wire Cleaning Motor Ozone Fan Dust Fan Hopper Motor Main Motor Drum Motor Suction Fan Lift Motor Tray 1 Lift Motor Tray 2 Lift Motor Tray 3 Lift Motor Tray 4 Cooling Fan3 Cooling Fan2 Cooling Fan1 Inverting Motor Cooling Fan Drive Motor ...

Page 35: ...Path Sensor Toner Waste Container Detection Sensor Toner Waste Container Full Detection Sensor Paper Remaining Sensor Tray 1 Paper Remaining Sensor Tray 2 Paper Remaining Sensor Tray 3 Paper Remaining Sensor Tray 4 Release Cover Open Sensor Cleaning Sensor Start Cleaning Sensor End Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor TDC Sensor Toner Sensor Right Cover Open Sensor Timing Sensor Upper Limit Sensor Tr...

Page 36: ...Clutch Sheet Bypass ADU Registration Clutch Separator Solenoid ADF Inverting Roller Clutch1 ADF Inverting Roller Clutch2 ADF Pinch Solenoid ADF Paper Feed Roller Clutch ADF Registration Roller Clutch1 ADF Registration Roller Clutch2 ADF Exit Roller Clutch ADF Inverting Roller Solenoid Paper Exit Transportation Roller Solenoid Fuser Cleaning Web Roller Solenoid Interlock Switch Paper Exit Solenoid ...

Page 37: ...000 Sheet Tray LCT 2 2 19 i ADF 2 2 3 Hopper Unit 2 2 6 System Console 2 2 18 PC Boards 2 2 16 Toner Waste Container 2 2 2 Filters 2 2 1 Control Panel Unit 2 2 5 Paper Exit Transportation 2 2 15 Fuser Unit 2 2 11 ADU 2 2 9 Bias Charge Unit 2 2 10 Drum Unit 2 2 8 Developer Unit 2 2 7 Scanner Unit 2 2 4 2 2 12 LSU Sheet Bypass Unit 2 2 14 Drive Unit 2 2 17 Paper Feed Module 2 2 13 ...

Page 38: ...structions 2 2 1 Filters 1 Turn the Power Switches to the OFF position 2 Disconnect the AC Power Cord 4911 3 Open the Right Cover 4 Remove 3 Screws H8 5 Remove the Right Side Rear Cover 117 6 Remove the Ozone Filter 1 4204 7 Remove the Dust Filter Cover 4217 8 Remove the Dust Filter 4218 ...

Page 39: ... 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 9 Remove the Ozone Filter 2 Cover 106 10 Remove the Ozone Filter 2 107 Following steps 11 15 are not applied for USA and Canada 11 Remove 9 Screws H8 12 Remove the Rear Upper Cover 110 13 Remove the Ozone Filter 4 4226 ...

Page 40: ...06 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 14 Remove 2 Screws 21 15 Pull the Rear Frame 2 3910 and remove the Ozone Filter 4 4226 Note To prevent Rear Frame 2 from warping do not pull hard on it ...

Page 41: ...006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 2 2 2 Toner Waste Container 1 Open the Right Cover 2 Remove 3 Screws H8 3 Remove the Right Side Rear Cover 117 4 Remove the Toner Waste Container 4108 ...

Page 42: ... Document Feeder i ADF Unit 1 Lift up the Original Tray Assembly 2 Clean the Exit Roller 814 3 Open the ADF Cover 4 Clean the Pickup Roller 511 Paper Feed Roller 508 Separation Roller 610 and Registration Roller 1 817 with a soft cloth saturated with isopropyl alcohol 5 Remove the Snap Ring H6 ...

Page 43: ... 4530 6010 6020 6030 6 Remove the Paper Feed Roller Shaft 505 Assembly in the arrow direction 7 Remove the Paper Feed Roller 508 8 Move the Pickup Bracket 9 Remove 2 Snap Rings H7 10 Remove the Pickup Roller Shaft 510 11 Remove the Pickup Roller 511 ...

Page 44: ...530 6010 6020 6030 12 Remove 3 Screws J9 13 Remove the Lower Opening and Shutting Guide 1 601 14 Remove the Separation Roller Assembly 15 Remove the Snap Ring H6 Note When reinstalling make sure that the Snap Ring is installed properly as illustrated ...

Page 45: ...that the Yellow Tooler s Die on the side of the roller is positioned as illustrated facing the Front Frame 18 Lift the Lower Opening and Shutting Guide 2 Assembly 19 Clean the Inverting Roller 809 with a soft cloth saturated with isopropyl alcohol 20 Open the ADF Unit 21 Remove 2 Screws H5 22 Remove the ADF Front Cover 418 23 Close the ADF Unit Note Release 3 Latch Hooks to remove the ADF Front Co...

Page 46: ...e Original Tray Assembly 27 Remove the ADF Rear Cover 627 28 Remove 1 Screw 21 29 Remove the Front ADF Cover Bracket 529 30 Release the ADF Cover Arm 624 31 Remove the ADF Cover 502 Assembly Note When reinstalling the ADF Cover Assembly make sure that the Vibration Guide Sheet 1 and 2 are reinstalled properly as illustrated ...

Page 47: ...0 6010 6020 6030 32 Remove 1 Screw 21 33 Remove the Registration Guide 2 721 34 Clean the Registration Roller 2 818 35 Remove the Snap Ring G6 36 Remove the D8 Bearing 822 37 Remove 2 Snap Rings G6 38 Remove the Clutch 1 801 39 Remove the D8 Bearing 822 ...

Page 48: ...1 Remove 2 Registration Guide Sheets 1 1119 and 2 Registration Guide Sheets 2 1120 Caution Do not remove the 3 indicated Screws Note When reinstalling the Registration Guide Sheet 1 and 2 make sure that the Sheets are placed on the marks as illustrated Mark Registration Guide Sheet Adhesive Double Coated Tape ...

Page 49: ...ng and Shutting Guide Assembly 43 Lift up the Original Tray Assembly 44 Nudge the Inverting Guide Assembly towards the right side to open it 45 Remove 2 Screws 21 46 Remove the Inverting Guide Assembly 47 Remove 2 Screws 21 48 Remove the Lower Exit Guide 716 49 Clean the Transport Roller 816 ...

Page 50: ... Scanner Lamp CCD Assembly 1 Move the Scanning Lamp to the position where it can be replaced See Sect 5 1 7 F8 00 2 Remove 2 Screws H8 3 Remove the Right Platen Cover 112 4 Remove the Glass Assembly 120 5 Remove 2 Lamp Holding Plates 1204 6 Release the Harness from the Clamp 7 Remove 2 Screws 21 ...

Page 51: ...urn the Inverter PC Board Case upside down 8 Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the Inverter PC Board 1209 9 Remove 2 Screws F10 10 Remove the Inverter PC Board 1209 11 Remove the Scanning Lamp 1228 Note Ensure that the Scanning Lamp Harness is reinstalled properly as illustrated ...

Page 52: ...ove the CCD Cover 1213 14 Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the CCD PC Board CN850 and CN851 Important Before proceeding make a note of the position of the alignment pointer If the CCD is not reinstalled at the same position it will affect the copy quality 15 Remove 2 Screws 1M 16 Remove the CCD Unit 1234 ...

Page 53: ...010 6020 6030 17 Remove 2 Screws 20 18 Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the Sensors 19 Remove 2 Multi Beam Sensors 1309 20 Remove 1 Screw 20 21 Disconnect the Harness on the Sensor 22 Remove the Multi Beam Sensor 1309 23 Clean the Mirror 1 1202 and Mirror 2 1214 ...

Page 54: ...20 4530 6010 6020 6030 2 2 4 2 Scanning Motor 1 Remove 9 Screws H8 2 Remove the Rear Upper Cover 110 3 Remove 2 Screws 21 4 Remove the Harness Clamp 2 3501 5 Disconnect the ADF Harness 6 Open the ADF Unit 7 Remove 2 Screws P4 8 Remove the ADF Unit ...

Page 55: ...move 2 Screws H8 10 Remove the Left Platen Cover 111 11 Remove 2 Screws H8 12 Remove the Right Platen Cover 112 13 Remove 2 Screws N6 14 Remove 4 Screws H8 15 Remove the Rear Platen Cover 113 16 Disconnect the Harness 17 Remove 2 Screws 1M 18 Remove the Scanning Motor 1325 ...

Page 56: ... 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 2 2 5 Control Panel Unit 1 Open the Front Cover 2 Swing the Hopper Unit in the direction of the arrow as illustrated 3 Remove the Battery Holder 4 Remove 7 Screws 21 5 Remove the Lower Control Panel Cover 101 ...

Page 57: ...0 6 Turn the Control Panel Unit upside down 7 Disconnect 4 Harnesses on the PNL1 PC Board CN220 CN221 CN222 and CN224 8 Remove 1 Screw 21 9 Disconnect 4 Harnesses on the PNL1 PC Board CN223 CN225 CN229 and CN230 10 Remove 4 Screws F10 11 Remove the PNL1 PC Board 8503 ...

Page 58: ...rd CN251 13 Remove 7 Screws F10 14 Remove the PNL2 PC Board 323 15 Disconnect the Harness on the INV PC Board CN2 16 Remove 2 Screws F10 17 Remove the INV PC Board 329 18 Remove 2 Screws F10 19 Release 2 Latch Hooks and remove the Upper Control Panel Cover 322 20 Remove 1 Screw F10 21 Remove the PNL4 PC Board 314 ...

Page 59: ...6010 6020 6030 22 Remove 4 Screws F10 23 Remove the PNL3 PC Board 313 24 Remove 2 Screws H4 25 Remove 2 Screws H4 26 Remove the LCD Module 328 27 Remove the Touch Panel 327 Note Reinstall the Battery Holder after reassembling the Lower Control Panel Cover ...

Page 60: ... See Sect 2 2 5 2 Swing the Hopper Unit to the right side See Sect 2 2 5 3 Rotate the Toner Bottle counter clockwise and remove it 4 Clean any toner residue from the Lower Hopper Cover 1411 5 Remove 1 Screw 21 6 Release 2 Latch Hooks and remove the Motor Cover 1413 7 Disconnect the Harness on the Hopper Motor ...

Page 61: ...61 JAN 2006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 8 Remove 2 Screws 21 9 Remove the Hopper Motor 1414 ...

Page 62: ...ect 2 2 5 3 Remove 1 Screw J9 4 Remove the Connector Cover 3930 5 Disconnect the Harness 6 Pull the Developer Release Lever 3823 out and turn it clockwise 7 Remove the Developer Unit 1632 8 Remove the Developer Exchange Knob 1405 9 Remove the old Splash Prevention Sheet 1602 Note When attaching the new Sheet make sure that it is aligned on the left side edge as illustrated ...

Page 63: ...loper Cover 1601 Removing the old Developer and Toner 11 Install the Developer Exchange Knob 1405 12 Turn the Developer Unit upside down over a suitable container and dump the used Developer and Toner by rotating the Knob 13 Remove the Duct Cover 1620 14 Clean the Duct Cover 1620 with a soft cloth saturated with water ...

Page 64: ...e Developer Unit 1632 with a dry soft cloth Caution Clean the Developer and Toner residue from the encircled areas thoroughly as shown in the illustrations If not properly cleaned problems related to static charge may occur If E3 13 occurs clean contamination on the Bias Terminal ...

Page 65: ...ockwise 5 Loosen 1 Screw and remove the Drum Unit Note When handling the Drum Unit hold by the Handle as illustrated Caution Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the OPC Drum Green and not to touch it with bare hands Caution The OPC Drum is sensitive to light To prevent optical exposure problems do not expose the OPC Drum to direct sunlight or bright light even if it is a 1000 Lux fluore...

Page 66: ...trated 8 Remove 3 Split Lock Washers 1825 9 Remove 3 Separators 1826 by unhooking the spring as illustrated Note When installing the Separators hook the springs by using a Tweezer or a Small Screw Driver Removing the Old OPC Drum 10 Remove 1 Screw 21 11 Remove the Corona Unit 1851 See steps 20 23 for cleaning instructions Caution The OPC Drum is sensitive to light To prevent optical exposure probl...

Page 67: ... 6020 6030 12 Release 2 Latch Hooks and remove the Frame Cover 1805 13 Remove 4 Screws 21 14 Remove the Front Fixation Plate 1822 15 Turn the Front Drum Bushing 1820 counter clockwise and remove it 16 Remove 4 Screws 21 17 Remove the Rear Fixation Plate 1844 ...

Page 68: ...520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 18 Turn the Rear Drum Bushing 1842 clockwise and remove it 19 Remove the OPC Drum 1811 20 Remove the Blade Pressure Spring 1807 21 Remove 1 Screw 20 22 Remove the Cleaning Blade 1847 Assembly ...

Page 69: ... Hooks are properly attached 23 Release 4 Latch Hooks and remove the Front and Rear Cleaning Felt 1849 1848 Assemblies Cleaning the Density Sensor 24 Clean the Density Sensor CDS PC Board 1846 with a dry cloth 25 Remove 1 Screw L9 26 Turn the Corona Unit upside down 27 Push in the Grid Base 1910 to unlatch and remove the Corona Grid 1919 ...

Page 70: ...4530 6010 6020 6030 28 Clean the Corona Grid 1919 with a soft cloth saturated with isopropyl alcohol 29 Remove the Front and Rear Block Sheets 1911 and 1920 30 Remove the Corona Wire 1915 and the Tension Spring 1914 31 Remove the Cleaning Base 3 1918 ...

Page 71: ...71 JAN 2006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 32 Clean the Corona Case 1906 with a soft cloth or a cotton swab saturated with isopropyl alcohol ...

Page 72: ...t ADU 1 Open the Front Cover See Sect 2 2 5 2 Swing the Hopper Unit to the right side See Sect 2 2 5 3 Turn the Lifting Lever 2327 counter clockwise 4 Pull the ADU Unit out 5 Clean the Exit Rollers A and B and C 2520 2521 2522 6 Remove 1 Screw F10 7 Remove the Intermediate Paper Guide 2404 ...

Page 73: ... 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 8 Clean the Intermediate Roller 2403 9 Clean the Registration Roller 2430 10 Pull out the 1st Paper Tray 11 Remove 1 Screw 25 12 Remove the Right Lock Plate 3810 13 Remove 1 Screw 21 14 Remove the Left Lock Plate 3812 ...

Page 74: ...e Registration Release Knob 2328 20 Remove 3 Screws 21 21 Remove the Inner Cover 2332 22 Remove 2 Registration Guide Springs 2409 and 2 Front Registration Springs 2413 23 Remove the Upper Registration Guide 2402 24 Disconnect the Harness 25 Remove 1 Screw 23 26 Remove the Clutch 2602 Note Ensure the wire terminal is secured on the gear frame to prevent shorting of the clutch harness ...

Page 75: ... 28 Remove 2 Snap Rings K9 29 Remove the 2 Bearings 822 30 Remove 2 Screws F10 31 Remove 2 E Rings J7 32 Remove the Intermediate Roller Gear 2621 33 Remove 2 Bearings 2603 34 Remove 2 Screws F10 35 Open the Under Registration Guide 2416 36 Disconnect the Harness 37 Remove the Under Registration Guide 2416 ...

Page 76: ...76 JAN 2006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 38 Remove the Registration Roller 2430 39 Remove the Intermediate Roller 2403 ...

Page 77: ...nit to the right side See Sect 2 2 5 3 Pull out the ADU Unit See Sect 2 2 9 4 Remove the Corona Unit 2 2352 5 Remove the Front and Rear Block Sheets 2307 2303 6 Remove the Tension Spring 2339 7 Remove the Corona Wire 1 2335 8 Remove the Tension Spring 1914 9 Remove the Corona Wire 2 2334 10 Remove 1 Screw F10 11 Release the Harness from the Clamp ...

Page 78: ...78 JAN 2006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 12 Disconnect the Harness 13 Pull out the LED PC Board 2343 14 Remove the LED Knob 2319 ...

Page 79: ...it to the right side See Sect 2 2 5 3 Open the Upper Exit Cover 4 Push the Release Lever 8136 down in order to free the Exit Guide 7 8126 5 Remove 2 Screws N3 6 Remove the Fuser Cover 121 7a Disconnect 4 Harnesses For DP 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 7b Disconnect 5 Harnesses For DP 3510 3520 3530 8 Remove 1 Screw 25 9 Remove the Fuser Unit 2035 ...

Page 80: ...0 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 10 Release the Harnesses from Hooks 11 Remove 1 Screw L6 12 Remove the Solenoid 2012 Assembly 13 Remove 1 Screw K2 14 Remove the Solenoid 2012 15 Remove 2 Screws K1 16 Remove the Cleaning Web Unit ...

Page 81: ...emove the Cleaning Web Roller 2007 Red 20 Remove the Cleaning Web 2003 White Note When reinstalling make sure that the Cleaning Web is spread out 21 Remove 1 Screw 25 22 Remove the Ground Plate 3 2214 23 Remove 1 Screw K1 24 Remove the Lower Paper Exit Guide 2213 25 Remove 2 Lower Separator Springs 2210 26 Remove 4 Lower Separators 2228 ...

Page 82: ...0 4510 6010 skip to steps 33 36 27 Remove 2 Snap Rings H6 28 Remove the Upper Paper Exit Guide 2223 29 Remove 2 Screws 36 30 Remove the Upper Separator Bracket 2120 31 Remove 5 Tension Springs 2219 32 Remove 5 Upper Separators 2227 For DP 3510 4510 6010 Follow steps 33 36 below 33 Remove 2 Screws 25 34 Remove the Upper Paper Exit Guide 2223 ...

Page 83: ...36 38 Remove 1 Screw K2 39 Remove the Rear Fuser Cover 2031 40 Remove 2 Screws 16 41 Remove 2 Fuser Lamps 2027 2028 Note 1 Do not touch the glass portion of the Fuser Lamps with bare hands Grease from finger prints will shorten its life cycle use isopropyl alcohol to clean finger prints 2 When reinstalling install the longer harness toward the rear side ...

Page 84: ... of the Jam Release Knob by turning clockwise 45 Remove the Jam Release Knob 2022 Note The Jam Release Knob and Screw are assembled 46 Remove 1 Screw K2 47 Remove the Front Fuser Cover 2021 48 Remove 2 Screws K1 49 Remove 1 Screw 21 50 Remove 1 Screw K2 51 Remove the Thermostat Base 2034 52 Remove 1 Screw K3 53 Remove the Thermistor Assembly 2019 ...

Page 85: ... the Lower Front Guide 2113 58 Remove 2 Screws K4 59 Remove 1 Screw K2 60 Remove the Upper Fuser Bracket 2115 61 Remove the Fuser Roller 2105 62 Remove the Fuser Roller Gear 2108 2 Fuser Roller Bearings 2107 and 2 Insulation Bushings 2106 Note Before removing note the position and or direction of the Gear Bearings and the Bushings for proper reinstallation ...

Page 86: ...3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 63 Remove the Pressure Roller 2205 64 Remove 2 Pressure Roller Bearings 2204 Note Before removing note the position and or direction of the Pressure Roller Bearings for proper reinstallation ...

Page 87: ...e LSU Cover 115 5 Remove the Right Platen Cover See Sect 2 2 4 6 Remove 2 Screws 20 7 Remove the LSU Shield Bracket 4009 8 Disconnect 3 Harnesses 9 Remove the Glass Assembly 120 See Sect 2 2 4 Important Before proceeding make a note of the position of the alignment pointer If the LSU is not reinstalled at the same position it will affect the scanning quality ...

Page 88: ... 2006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 10 Remove 3 Screws L1 11 Remove the LSU 4030 12 Turn the LSU upside down 13 Clean the LSU Glass with a soft cloth saturated with isopropyl alcohol ...

Page 89: ...en the Right Cover 2908 2 Clean the Intermediate Rollers 3005 3010 with a soft cloth saturated with isopropyl alcohol 3 Remove 1 Screw J4 4 Remove the Right Cover 2908 5 Push the Pin and remove the Right Cover 2908 6 Pull out the 1st and 2nd Paper Trays 7 Disconnect the Harness 8 Remove 1 Screw J4 ...

Page 90: ...0 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 9 Remove the 1st Paper Feed Module 10 Remove 1 Screw 21 11 Remove the Front Feed Guide 3122 12 Remove the Bushing 2 208 and One Way Clutch 3205 13 Lift the Reverse Roller 3219 Assembly and remove the Feed Roller 3204 ...

Page 91: ...ove the Pickup Roller 3211 Note When reinstalling make sure that the Latches and the Notches are aligned as illustrated 16 Remove the Snap Ring H6 17 Remove the Reverse Roller 3219 Note When reinstalling make sure that the Gears are aligned and that the Snap Ring is reinstalled properly as illustrated ...

Page 92: ... Remove 1 Screw J4 20 Remove the 2nd Paper Feed Module Note Follow the instructions for steps 10 17 of the 1st Paper Feed Module 21 Remove the Snap Ring G6 22 Remove the 3 Intermediate Roller 3005 3010 Assemblies 23 Remove the Bearing 2603 24 Remove the E RIng K5 25 Remove the Coupling Roller 3001 ...

Page 93: ...s 4603 4611 3 Pull out the ADU 2351 See Sect 2 2 9 Note Ref No 2351 does not include all individual parts 4 Remove 1 Screw 25 5 Remove the Sheet Bypass 6 Remove 2 Screws 25 7 Remove the Upper Sheet Bypass Guide 4605 8 Remove 2 Snap Rings H6 9 Remove 2 Stoppers 4601 10 Remove 2 Spacers 4602 11 Remove the Front Pickup Roller 4611 White and the Rear Pickup Roller 4603 Black ...

Page 94: ... Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 12 Remove 4 Screws 25 13 Remove the Feed Cover 4638 Assembly 14 Remove the Snap Ring H6 15 Remove the Paper Feed Roller 4608 16 Remove the Feed Roller 4612 ...

Page 95: ...er 3 8003 4 Open the Front Cover See Sect 2 2 5 5 Open the Paper Exit Cover See Sect 2 2 11 6 Remove 4 Screws 25 7 Remove the Plate Assembly 8 Clean the Pressure Roller 8311 and Exit Roller 3 8312 with a soft cloth saturated with isopropyl alcohol Note Ensure that the Front Cover and the Paper Exit Cover are opened before reinstalling the Plate Assembly back into the machine ...

Page 96: ...30 2 2 16 PC Boards 1 Remove the Rear Upper Plate See Sect 2 2 4 2 2 Disconnect All Harnesses on the DRV PC Board 3 Remove 7 Screws 21 4 Remove the DRV PC Board 8601 5 Remove 4 Screws 21 6 Remove the SC Cover Bracket 3303 7 Disconnect All Harnesses on the SC PC Board ...

Page 97: ...move 6 Screws 21 9 Remove the SC PC Board 8401 10 Remove 2 Screws 11 Remove the PRT PC Board 8402 12 Remove 5 Screws H8 13 Remove 1 Screw M5 14 Remove the Rear Lower Cover 108 15 Remove the Toner Waste Container See Sect 2 2 2 16 Disconnect All Harnesses on the SPC PC Board ...

Page 98: ...20 6030 17 Remove 5 Screws 21 18 Remove the SPC PC Board 8501 19 Remove 3 Screws 21 20 Remove NFL PC Board 8603 Assembly 21 Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the NFL PC Board CN132 and CN133 22 Remove 2 Screws 21 23 Remove 1 Screw F10 24 Remove the Finisher Bracket 3508 ...

Page 99: ...6030 25 Remove 4 Screws 21 26 Remove the Paper Exit Motor 8127 Assembly 27 Disconnect 3 Harnesses 28 Open the Front Cover See Sect 2 2 5 29 Pull out 1st Paper Tray 30 Remove 2 Screws 21 31 Remove the LVPS Cover 203 32 Remove 1 Screw 21 33 Pull out the LVPS Assembly ...

Page 100: ...sses on the DC PC Board CN141 CN142 CN143 CN144 and CN145 35 Remove 2 Screws 21 36 Remove the DC PC Board 8701 37 Remove 7 Screws 21 38 Remove the Heat Sink 3311 39 Remove 6 Screws 21 40 Remove the LVPS 8702 41 Disconnect 3 Harnesses on the ACD PC Board CN101 CN105 and CN106 42 Remove 2 Screws 21 ...

Page 101: ...4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 43 Pull out the ACD PC Board 8704 Assembly 44 Disconnect the Harness on the ACD PC Board CN102 45 Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the ACD PC Board CN103 and CN104 46 Remove 6 Screws 21 47 Remove the ACD PC Board 8704 ...

Page 102: ...move the Rear Upper Plate See Sect 2 2 4 2 3 Remove the Rear Lower Plate and SC Cover Bracket See Sect 2 2 16 4 Disconnect All Harnesses on the SC PC Board See Sect 2 2 16 5 Loosen 5 Screws 21 6 Remove the SC Bracket 3306 7 Release the Harnesses from 2 Clamps 8 Loosen 2 Screws 21 9 Remove the SC Support Bracket 3305 10 Disconnect the Harness ...

Page 103: ...510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 11 Remove 2 Screws 21 12 Remove the Fan 4219 Assembly 13 Remove 2 Screws 20 14 Remove the Fan 4221 Assembly 15 Remove 2 Screws H8 16 Remove the Rear Cover 9301 17 Remove 4 Screws 21 18 Remove the Rear Frame 2 3910 ...

Page 104: ...nit See Sect 2 2 5 21 Pull out the ADU 2351 and Drum Unit 1852 Note Ref No 2351 and 1852 do not include all individual parts 22 Remove the Fuser Cover See Sect 2 2 11 23 Remove 1 Screw 24 24 Pull out Fuser Unit 2035 25 Remove 1 Screw L1 26 Remove the Flange Cap 2701 27 Remove the Fly Wheel 2702 28 Remove the Drum Drive Gear 2703 ...

Page 105: ...510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 29 Remove the Pin 2743 30 Remove 2 Screws 21 31 Move the Harness Bracket 3525 32 Disconnect the Harness on the Toner Waste Sensor 33 Disconnect the Harness on the HVPS CN101 34 Lift up the Toner Waste Pipe 2 4111 ...

Page 106: ...P 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 35 Remove 3 Screws 21 36 Remove the HVPS Bracket 3611 37 Remove 5 Screws 21 38 Remove the HVPS 8705 39 Remove 1 Screw 21 40 Remove the Belt Cover 2824 41 Release the F Belt 2820 ...

Page 107: ...0 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 42 Disconnect 2 Harnesses 43 Remove 3 Screws 21 44 Remove the Fan Assembly 45 Disconnect 8 Harnesses 46 Release the Harnesses from 7 Clamps 47 Remove 13 Screws 25 48 Remove the Drive Unit 49 Remove E Ring L2 ...

Page 108: ... 6020 6030 50 Remove the Drum Drive Shaft 2704 51 Remove 4 E Rings J7 and K5 2 Snap Rings G6 2 Pins 2840 and 6 Gears 2806 x 2 2808 2833 2834 and 2835 52 Remove 11 Screws 21 53 Remove the Drum Drive Plate 2709 54 Remove 3 Screws 21 55 Remove the Drum Motor 2708 ...

Page 109: ...109 JAN 2006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 56 Disconnect the Harness and release it from the Clamp 57 Remove 2 Screws M3 58 Remove the DC Brower 4220 ...

Page 110: ...0 2 2 18 System Console 2 2 18 1 3rd 4th Paper Feed Module 1 Open the Release Cover 9324 2 Clean the Intermediate Roller 3010 3 Remove 1 Screw H8 4 Remove the Right Side Rear Cover 9319 5 Remove 1 Screw J4 6 Push the Right Cover Shaft 2914 and remove Release Cover 9324 ...

Page 111: ...move 1 Screw J4 9 Remove 3rd Paper Feed Module Note Follow the instructions for steps 10 17 of the 1st Paper Feed Module 10 Remove the 4th Paper Feed Module by following the steps for the 3rd Paper Feed Module 11 Remove 2 Intermediate Rollers 3010 by following the steps for the ones in the Main Unit ...

Page 112: ...H8 2 Remove the Rear Cover 9301 3 Disconnect the Harness on the System Console Drive Motor 4 Remove 4 Screws J4 5 Remove 1 Screw 21 6 Remove the Drive Motor 9410 7 Release the Harness from 2 Clamps 8 Disconnect the Harness on the CST PC Board CN602 9 Remove 4 Screws J4 10 Remove the Timing Belt 9401 and the Motor Bracket 9426 Assembly ...

Page 113: ...ve 6 Screws 21 13 Remove 2 Lift Motor 2 4023 Assemblies 14 Release the Harness from the Clamp 15 Remove 2 Screws 5M 16 Remove the Lift Motor 2 4023 17 Disconnect all Harnesses on the CST PC Board 18 Remove 1 Screw 21 19 Release 5 Locking Supports 9419 on the CST PC Board 20 Remove the APF PC Board 8707 ...

Page 114: ...4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 2 2 19 3000 Sheet Tray LCT 1 Remove 2 Screws 21 2 Remove the Front Guide 9142 3 Clean the Feed Roller 9129 4 Remove the Snap Ring H6 5 Remove the Feed Roller 9129 6 Remove 4 Screws J2 7 Remove the Top Cover 8801 ...

Page 115: ...he Guide Bracket 9112 10 Remove the Pickup Roller 9107 11 Remove 3 Screws J3 12 Remove the Reinforcement Bracket 9101 13 Remove the Paper Feed Roller 9111 14 Disconnect All Harnesses on the LCT PC Board 15 Remove 1 Screw 21 16 Release 5 Card Spacers 8903 on the LCT PC Board 17 Remove the LCT PC Board 8408 ...

Page 116: ... Note Screw See Note Screw See Note Screw See Note Screw See Note Screw See Note Screw See Note XTB3 6FFJ XYN3 F8FJ XTB4 8FFJ XYN4 F6FJ XYN3 F6FJ XYN4 F8FJ 21 23 25 XTB4 10FFJ 51 35 36 XYN3 F5FJ 3F 24 XTB3 12GFJ 6A XTB4 6FFJ XTB3 8FFJ 1M XTW3 8SFJ 6L 20 Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw XYN3 J8FJ 16 XTB3 8JFJ 19 XTW 6SFJ XTB3 6F XYN3 F8 XTB4 ...

Page 117: ...crew See Note Screw See Note Shoulder Screw See Note Screw See Note Screw See Note Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw XTT4 8HFN J2 Silver Screw XTB4 8HFJ XTB4 10GFJ J4 J3 FFPFA01632 Shoulder Screw H9 XTB4 10GFN Silver Screw XTB26 8JFJ H5 H4 XYA3 EF6FJ G7 XTB3 8GFJ F10 XYC3 FG10FJ F9 FFPFJ0039B Snap Ring G6 FFPFJ0033B Snap Ring FFPFJ0041B XYN3 F4 DZPB000006 XTW3 8SFC XTB4 8H XTB4...

Page 118: ...Screw See Note Shoulder Screw See Note Screw See Note Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw XTB3 10GFJ XTB3 6GFJ J5 J9 FFPFA01071 XSN3 W8FJ TP XYN4 F16FJ FFPFA01761 FFPFA01771 Black Shoulder Screw Shoulder Screw Shoulder Screw XYN4 F12FJ XTW3 12QFJ K1 K2 K4 K7 K8 L1 K3 XUC5VM XUC6VM XUC4VM K5 K6 J7 XUC3VM E Ring E Ring E Ring E Ring E Ring J6 XUC7VM J8 FFPFJ0043B XTB3 10G XTB3 6G FFPFA0107B XSN3 W8F...

Page 119: ...Screw See Note Screw See Note Screw See Note Screw See Note Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw E Ring E Ring XUC9VM L2 XYA3 FF6FJ M5 XTW3 8GFJ XTW4 12LFJ XTB26 6H M7 M6 M8 XTB3 8GFN XSB2 6FJ XTB4 6HFJ Silver Screw M9 N1 N2 NS010416 M4 FFPFA01461 XYC3 FG8FJ L5 L6 XTB3 4FFJ L9 XTN4 34GFJ L4 XYN26 F6FJ L3 XUC2VM XYA3 FF6 XTW3 8G XTW4 12L XSB2 6 XTB4 6H FFPFA0146 X...

Page 120: ...rew See Note Screw See Note Screw See Note Screw See Note Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw XTB4 10FFJ XTN3 12FFJB Blue Screw XTN5 10FFJ FFPFA01591 FFPFA01611 Shoulder Screw N3 N4 N5 N7 N6 XSN2 5FJ P6 FFPFA0152 P7 XTN3 8G P5 XTW3 8PFJ P8 PF2217P319A P4 XTW3 8LFJ XTB3 6FFJ RP P1 P3 P2 Shoulder Screw FFPFA00861 N9 FFPFA01471 XTB4 10F XTN3 12FFUBC XTN5 10F FFPFA0...

Page 121: ...rew See Note Screw See Note Screw See Note Screw See Note Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw XTW4 10PFJ P9 XYA4 FF10 Q1 XSB26 4FJ Q3 FFPFA0068B Shoulder Screw Q4 XTT4 8HFN Q5 XSB3 12FJ Q2 DZPA000098 Shoulder Screw Q6 XTW3 8F Q7 XYN4 C6BN R8 DZPA000086 Silver Screw S6 R1 XTB3 4GFN XTW4 10P XSB2 6 4 XSB3 12 DZPA000076 B4X7TTS RP Y18 XTB4 7FFJ RP ...

Page 122: ...g of Rollers Rollers should be cleaned with water and cloth Use of IPA Isopropyl alcohol should be used sparingly 3 Precautions for Disassembly and Adjustment Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position and then unplug the AC Power Cord from the wall outlet before disassembling the machine CAUTION After taking the unit apart do no...

Page 123: ...er when servicing the photocopier take the following precautions 1 Do not insert into the path of the laser any screwdrivers or other tools that have high reflectance properties 2 Before servicing the photocopier take off any watches rings or other metallic objects that you may be wearing This is to avoid the danger of the laser entering the eye by reflecting off the metallic objects being worn Si...

Page 124: ...are the RAM DATA with the previously printed one 2 Auto Document Feeder ADF Check Clean 1 Clean the Rollers and Separation Rubber with Isopropyl Alcohol when required 3 Scanner Unit Check Clean 1 Clean the Scanning Glass or White Seal Guide with Isopropyl Alcohol when required 4 Transmitter Unit Check Clean 1 Remove any foreign obstacles 2 Clean the Rollers with Isopropyl Alcohol when required 5 M...

Page 125: ...0 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 3 3 Preventive Maintenance Points 6 5 7 8 9 10 57 58 A 17 45 49 48 47 25 2 52 52 52 11 12 3 22 23 16 18 1 B 4 56 54 55 50 51 52 53 43 50 51 61 59 60 53 50 51 53 50 51 24 19 20 21 46 53 44 26 28 27 ...

Page 126: ...126 JAN 2006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 DETAIL A DETAIL B 37 33 34 31 35 39 404142 32 38 29 30 36 13 14 15 ...

Page 127: ...t Roller 816 120K Water 1 11 Inverting Roller 809 120K Water 1 12 Exit Roller 814 120K Water 1 Hopper Unit 13 Toner Bottle Holder 1402 480K Water 1 Refer to Sect 2 2 6 F7 02 Total Count 14 Toner Bottle Support 1407 480K Water 1 15 Lower Hopper Cover 1411 480K Water 1 Developer Unit Developer 240K 4 Refer to Sect 2 2 7 F7 02 Process Unit Count 16 Splash Prevention Sheet 1602 720K 17 Duct Cover 1620...

Page 128: ... 6030 2205 480K 41 Pressure Roller DP 3510 3520 3530 2232 480K 42 Pressure Roller Bearing DP 3510 3520 3530 2233 480K Automatic Duplex Unit 43 Intermediate Roller 2403 120K Water 1 Refer to Sect 2 2 9 F7 03 2 Sided Count 44 Exit Roller 2520 2521 2522 120K Water 1 45 Registration Roller 2430 120K Water 1 1 200K 46 Registration Roller Bearing 2331 2603 120K Water 1 1 200K 47 Transfer Frame 2310 240K...

Page 129: ...ance Refer to Section 3 3 and 3 4 2 Press the FUNCTION ORIGINAL SIZE LEDGER A3 and 3 keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode 3 Enter the Copy Service Mode F5 70 PM cycle and change to the desired value 4 Press FUNCTION and C CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode 3 5 2 Call for P M Fuser Web Default 240K 1 Perform the P M Preventive Maintenance Refer to Section 3 3 ...

Page 130: ...te Container Indicators Upon detecting that the Toner Waste Container is full the machine will complete the current job and stop operating A blinking Maintenance and Toner Waste Container Indicators will appear on the display To continue using the machine temporarily while waiting for the Service Technician press FUNCTION and 2 keys simultaneously up to 5 000 copies max B Steady Maintenance and To...

Page 131: ...on the SC PCB is 4 MB Two 2 Optional Expansion 8 MB Program Memory FRM8 PCB can be installed into SLOT 1 and SLOT 2 The Firmware to be written into the 4 MB onboard the 8 MB of SLOT 1 SLOT 2 depend upon the configuration of the Standard PCL or PS Options 1 Standard The Standard Program is only written into the 4 MB onboard which is assigned as ROM Code A 2 For PCL Option The PCL Control Program mu...

Page 132: ...re saved in this Board The Firmware is transferred as Serial Data from SC PCB D SPC PC Board Firmware The 512 KB Program Memory F ROM is mounted on the SPC PCB as a standard The Programs for Scanner Control and Printer Control are saved in the Board The Firmware is transferred as Serial Data from SC PCB E Firmware Updating Ports Three 3 types of Ports are available for updating the firmware 1 Ethe...

Page 133: ...ools NwFirmup NwFirmup OI pdf Refer to the Network Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD Setup xFirmware Tools NwFirmup Setup Setup exe 2 Preparing the Firmware Code Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folde...

Page 134: ...s occurs please refer to the next section Updating through the Parallel Port and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit 4 The suffix _xx for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination location 5 After the Firmeware Update is completed enter the F5 F6 Parameters according to the lists printed in step 3 above Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File ...

Page 135: ... than factory default 3 6 4 Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware Card 1 Before starting print the F5 F6 Parameters Copier Lists 2 Turn the Main Power Switch on the back of the unit not the side of the unit to the OFF O position 3 Install the appropriate Master Firmware Card into the machine 4 Turn the Main Power Switch on the back of the unit to the ON I position 5 Press the FUNCTION OR...

Page 136: ...the Power Switch on the left side and the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the OFF position See 3 6 7 2 Insert the Flash Memory Card 4 MB or 8 MB into the machine 3 Turn the Main Power Switch on the back and the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the ON position 4 Press the FUNCTION ORIGINAL SIZE LEDGER A3 and 3 keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mod...

Page 137: ...ry Card is erased machine prompts Update Program Card Press NO 7 Press STOP first and then press FUNCTION CLEAR keys simultaneously to return to standby 8 Turn the Power Switch on the left side and the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the OFF position See 3 6 7 9 Remove the blank Flash Memory Card from the machine 10 Repeat from Step 2 above if you are erasing another Master Firmwar...

Page 138: ...l Firmware Update Tool to update the firmware to the required level If the unit does not boot up properly follow the steps below 1 Turn the power Off use the power switch on the back of the unit not the side of the unit Before proceeding to the next step you must prepare either the Local Firmware Update Tool or create the Master Firmware Flash Cards read the appropriate sections first If using the...

Page 139: ...ber a AU b English French Spanish g German French Italian Division Soft When it is divided into a and b SFDM PNL A A V1xxxx PU Destination Code Copier PU USA Canada PB UK Destination Code Fax AU USA Canada AB UK Firmware Version V1xxxx Language Code A A English C French Spanish B A English Spanish Portuguese Firmware Type A Standard B C D E F Optional Model Number a AU b English French Spanish g G...

Page 140: ...nal Model Number etc a AU b English French Spanish g German French Italian Division Soft When it is divided into a and b MMK2 PNL A A Vxxxxx PU Destination Code Copier PU USA Canada PB UK Destination Code Fax AU USA Canada AB UK Firmware Version V1xxxx Language Code A A English C French Spanish B A English Spanish German French Italian Firmware Type A Standard Model Number a AU Division Soft When ...

Page 141: ...al Model Number etc a AU b English French Spanish g German French Italian Division Soft When it is divided into a and b M25R PNL A A Vxxxxx PU Destination Code Copier PU USA Canada PB UK Destination Code Fax AU USA Canada AB UK Firmware Version V1xxxx Language Code A A English C French Spanish B A English Spanish German French Italian Firmware Type A Standard Model Number a AU Division Soft When i...

Page 142: ... 6 7 Replace Exposure Lamp Platen Glass OPC Drum 1 8 Developer 1 9 OPC Drum Developer 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 4 10 Corona Unit 11 Drum Unit 1 12 Toner Density Sensor 1 13 TDC Sensor 1 2 3 3 4 2 3 4 5 3 4 2 3 1 2 4 5 2 3 5 6 1 2 2 3 2 3 Replace Developer 14 LSU 1 2 3 4 15 SC PC Board 1 2 Input F5 F6 Parameter Digital QUANTUM ON OFF 1 Copy Quality Adjustment related to the Copier Service Mode F6 Codes 2 F6 28...

Page 143: ...ias Voltage of the Developer DP 35xx 250 300 copies DP 45xx 150 200 copies DP 60xx 50 100 copies 2 Ensure that Ledger A3 Size Paper is loaded in one of the Trays and pull out the remaining trays including the bypass tray to disable them 3 Press the FUNCTION ORIGINAL SIZE LEDGER A3 and 3 keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode 4 Press the 8 and START keys to enter the F8 Mode Se...

Page 144: ... gray scale P N FQ SJ1011 and verify the density as shown below If it is within specification skip to step 10 a Gray scale 1 should not be visible b Gray scale 2 should be clearly visible 5 Press the RESET key to exit the F2 Mode 6 Press the 6 and START keys to enter the F6 Mode Adjust Parameters 7 Enter F6 50 Mode T P Mode Image Density 8 Press the INPUT button 9 Enter the new content 10 Enter a ...

Page 145: ...d not be visible b Gray scale 2 should be clearly visible 5 Press the RESET key to exit the F2 Mode 6 Press the 6 and START keys to enter the F6 Mode Adjust Parameters 7 Enter F6 55 Mode T P Mode Contrast 8 Press the INPUT button 9 Enter the new content 10 Enter a 3 digit value Note The RESET key is used to enter a negative value Lighter side Darker side 11 Press OK button twice 12 Enter F2 Mode 1...

Page 146: ...and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size Empty or pull out all the remaining trays including the bypass tray to disable them 2 Press the FUNCTION ORIGINAL SIZE LEDGER A3 and 3 keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode 3 Perform the Service Mode F1 03 Print Test Pattern 1 4 Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge refer to the Figure above 5 Perform ...

Page 147: ...e the following procedures during PM 1 Make sure that the LAN cable is disconnected before performing F8 09 2 Make sure that paper is set in any paper tray before performing F8 09 3 After performing F8 14 please use the additional procedure manually for all machines which were produced from Feb 02 to May 02 production Serial No range from BBG2Kxxxxxx to EBG2Kxxxxxx 3 QUANTUM Control Timing Refer t...

Page 148: ...al display 8 When the Power Switch is turned ON After the Power Switch is turned On 9 At 100 prints after the Power Switch was turned ON Upon reaching the specified number of prints 2 10 When the Auto Off mode is cancelled After cancelling the Auto off mode 11 At 100 prints after the Auto Off mode was cancelled When reaching the counters 2 12 6 hours after the previous QUANTUM After reaching the s...

Page 149: ...e machine to the ON I position and continue holding the keys for approximately 30 seconds until the Display becomes stable The LCD Display starts blinking and shows a on the upper left edge of the display Note If you do not hold the ENERGY SAVER and FUNCTION keys down long enogh the Display may go OFF 4 Press the on the upper left edge of the display press the on the lower right edge and press the...

Page 150: ...d throughcorrectly Does the recording paper exit the unit Troubleshoot printed copy quality problems Troubleshoot the Document Feeder Check for recording paper path problems TroubleshootImproper LCDDisplay Troubleshoot any 3 digit CODE displayed Does the unit produce normal copies Troubleshoot communication problems transmission reception dialing polling information codes or diagnostic codes Does ...

Page 151: ...trouble resolved Replace the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit Is the trouble resolved Check connectors CN52 SC PCB and CN220 PNL1 PCB Is LED LCD displayed Does the display appear normal Replace the LCD Module Replace the Touch Panel Does CN52 pin 3 on the SC PCB measure 5 VDC Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No START END END ...

Page 152: ...PCB normal Is the OPC Drum Developer Unit operational Replace the OPC Drum Developer Unit 1 Check all connectors and voltages on the PS 3 Replace the PS 2 Check the contacts between PS and Developer Unit Yes No Yes Yes No No 1 Check all connectors and voltages on the SPC PCB 2 Replace the SPC PCB END Paper Travel Is the Test Pattern printout in Copier F1 Mode or Fax Service Mode 3 normal ...

Page 153: ...rge Wire with a soft dry cloth 2 Replace the Charge Unit 1 Check all connectors and voltages on the PS 2 Check the Spring Connector and voltage on the PS 3 Replace the PS Are there any foreign particles or stains blocking the Laser Beam path Yes No Is the SPC PCB normal 1 Remove the particles from the laser beam path or clean the stains 2 Replace the LSU 1 Check all connectors and voltages on the ...

Page 154: ...ft dry cloth 2 Replace the Corona Unit Yes No Clean or replace the rollers Yes No Check the Scanner mechanism No Yes Yes Is the recording paper damp Is the OPC Developer Unit operational 1 Remove the particles from the laser beam path or clean the stains 2 Replace the LSU Are there any foreign particles or stains in the Corona Unit No Yes Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean Paper Trav...

Page 155: ...ressure Roller surfaces clean No Yes Is the recording paper damp Are there any foreign particles or stains in the Corona Unit No Yes Yes No Replace the recording paper Replace the OPC Developer Unit 1 Clean the Corona Wire with a soft dry cloth 2 Replace the Corona Unit Clean or replace the rollers Paper Travel A A A A A Is the Test Pattern printout in Copier F1 Mode or Fax Service Mode 3 normal ...

Page 156: ...there any foreign particles or stains in the Corona Unit Yes No Replace the OPC Developer Unit 1 Clean the Corona Wire with a soft dry cloth 2 Replace the Corona Unit Is the LSU normal No Yes Replace the LSU END No Yes Clean or replace the rollers Paper Travel P Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean Is the Test Pattern printout in Copier F1 Mode or Fax Service Mode 3 normal ...

Page 157: ...Developer Unit operational No Yes Is the LSU normal No Yes Replace the LSU Is the HVPS normal 1 Check all connectors and voltages on the HVPS 2 Check the Spring Connector and voltage on the HVPS 3 Replace the HVPS Yes No END No Yes Clean or replace the rollers Paper Travel P Are there any foreign particles or stains in the Corona Unit Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean Is the Test Pa...

Page 158: ...Yes Is the recording paper damp Yes No Replace the recording paper Replace the OPC Drum Developer Unit Is the PS normal 1 Check all connectors and voltages on the PS 2 Check the Spring Connector and voltages on the PS 3 Replace the PS Yes No END No Yes Clean or replace the rollers Paper Travel P Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean Is the Test Pattern printout in Copier F1 Mode or Fax ...

Page 159: ...ax Service Mode 3 normal Check the Scanner mechanism Reset the Developer Unit as shown in the Illustration below No Yes Is the OPC Developer Unit operational Is the recording paper damp Yes No Replace the paper Are there any foreign particles or stains blocking the Laser Unit path Yes No 1 Remove the particles from the laser beam path or clean the stains 2 Replace the LSU Is the HVPS normal 1 Chec...

Page 160: ...paper damp Yes No Replace the recording paper Replace the OPC Drum Developer Unit Is the PS normal 1 Check all connectors and voltages on the PS 2 Replace the PS Yes No 1 Clean the Charge Wire with a soft dry cloth 2 Replace the Charge Unit Are there any foreign particles or stains in the Charge Unit No Yes Paper Travel P Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean Is the Test Pattern printou...

Page 161: ...using Printed image does not bond to the paper Note Replace the entire Fuser Unit when the Thermostat and or the Thermistor turn into an open circuit END Is the Fuser Unit normal No Yes Replace the Fuser Unit See Note START No Yes Is the recording paper damp Replace the recording paper P ...

Page 162: ... paper damp Replace the recording paper Is the OPC Drum Developer Unit operational Yes No Replace the OPC Drum Developer Unit P Paper Travel Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean END No Yes Clean or replace the rollers START Is the OPC Drum Developer Unit operational Yes No Replace the OPC Drum Developer Unit P Paper Travel Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean ...

Page 163: ...any foreign particles or stains in the Fuser Unit 2 Clean or replace the rollers 1 Remove any foreign particles and or clean the stains Are there any foreign particles or stains in the paper path Yes No Remove any obstructions and or clean the paper path No Yes Is the recording paper skewing Ensure the paper is set correctly in the Paper Tray and that the Paper Guides are properly adjusted No Yes ...

Page 164: ...eceiving test with the reference fax unit Is the printed copy correct Yes No Make a local copy No Yes Check the connections of CN850 851 on the CCD PCB CN 55 56 on the SC PCB the Scanning Lamp Is the received copy correct 1 Check CN390 on the FXB PCB 2 Check CN22 25 on MJR PCB 3 Check the Telephone Line Cord 4 Replace the FXB PCB Yes No Is a poor copy printed only when receiving from a specific tr...

Page 165: ...10 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 4 3 15 Document Skewing END START Is the LSU normal Check the Scanner mechanism Check or replace LSU No No Yes Yes Is the Test Pattern printout in Copier F1 Mode normal Copy Mode Sample ...

Page 166: ...Yes No Yes No Replace with correct paper Replace with the Panasonic Toner Are all switches and sensors operating properly Do the rollers rotate properly Yes No Are there any foreign particles or paper pieces in the receiver unit Yes No Remove the foreign particles or paper pieces from the receiver unit 1 Check all rollers gears drive clutches and springs 2 Adjust or replace any defective parts Adj...

Page 167: ...ng Rollers dirty Are there any foreign particles or paper pieces in the scanning area Yes No Remove the foreign particles or paper pieces from the scanning area No Yes Is the scanning area dirty 1 Clean the Scanning Glass 2 Clean Mirrors 1 and 2 No Yes Clean the rollers Is the Scanner Block abnormal 1 Check CN SC PCB 2 Check CN CCD PCB 3 Replace the CCD Assembly 4 Replace the SC PCB Yes No ...

Page 168: ...tor to verify the proper information Check the power switch cables and the current settings of unit Does the Default Gateway respond to the ping IP command Ask the Network Administrator to check the Default Gateway and system status Does the unit respond to the ping host name command Ask the Network Administrator to check the Default Gateway and system status Ask the Network Administrator to verif...

Page 169: ...rent layers As with all networking TCP IP works better when its plugged in therefore start your troubleshooting by checking the Physical Connectivity first the cable s In our examples we ll use several simple tools readily available in the DOS command line utility for troubleshooting There are many other utilities available for checking more detailed information some are Free of charge others are ...

Page 170: ...G is a command line tool included with every Microsoft TCP IP client any DOS or Windows client with the TCP IP protocol installed PING is a simple utility that is used to send a test packet to a specified IP Address or Hostname then if everything is working properly the packet is echoed back returned Sample command line PINGing and parameters are shown below There are several available options tha...

Page 171: ... 168 3 254 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 192 168 3 254 bytes 32 time 5ms TTL 253 Reply from 192 168 3 254 bytes 32 time 4ms TTL 253 Reply from 192 168 3 254 bytes 32 time 4ms TTL 253 Reply from 192 168 3 254 bytes 32 time 4ms TTL 253 C WINDOWS ping sv2 labo pcc com Pinging sv2 labo pcc com 192 168 1 2 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 192 168 1 2 bytes 32 time 5ms TTL 253 Reply from 192 168 1 2 ...

Page 172: ... out b To determine whether a router is slow and needs to be upgraded or additional routers should be installed on the network You can determine this by simply comparing the time it takes for a packet to get through a particular router If its return time is significantly higher than the other routers it should be upgraded To use this utility from the DOS command line type tracert IP Address or Hos...

Page 173: ...simple route that took only a single hop When another network is added as the number of hosts grows it gets complicated and the systems on the most distant networks cannot communicate When the router receives a packet in this case it cannot find a route to the remote network It then discards the packet and a message indicating destination host unreachable is sent to the originator Here is where th...

Page 174: ...ollowing output A Address Record in Domain From the DOS command line type Is t A Domain Name to display the following output To leave from this menu type exit on the command line C WINDOWS route print Active Routes Network Address Netmask Gateway Address Interface Metric 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 192 168 3 254 192 168 3 2 1 127 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 1 192 168 3 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 3 2 192 ...

Page 175: ...mand line to bring up the Telnet screen Then click on the Terminal menu and on Preferences check the Local Echo and Block Cursor radio dials and click on the OK button Click on the Connect menu then click on Remote System Enter 25 in the Port field and click on Connect button For example C WINDOWS telnet telnet to ef1 labo pcc com 192 168 3 5 220 ef1 labo pcc com DP18xx V xx helo 250 Hello mail fr...

Page 176: ...nected 5 LVPS is defective 6 SPC PCB connector is disconnected 7 SPC PCB is defective U6 Close Right Cover 1 Right Cover is open 2 Right Cover Sensor is disconnected 3 Right Cover Sensor is defective 4 LVPS connector is disconnected 5 LVPS is defective 6 SPC PCB connector is disconnected 7 SPC PCB is defective U7 Close Right Cover Lower System Console 1 Right Cover is open 2 Right Cover Sensor is ...

Page 177: ...sconnected 3 ADF Sensor is defective U30 Close Punch Cover 1 Punch Cover is open 2 Punch Cover Sensor is disconnected 3 Punch Cover Sensor is defective U31 Remove Paper in Saddle Unit 1 Paper Jam in the Saddle Unit 2 Paper Sensor is disconnected 3 Paper Sensor is defective U32 Close Saddle Unit Cover 1 Saddle Unit Cover is open 2 Saddle Cover Sensor is disconnected 3 Saddle Cover Sensor is defecti...

Page 178: ...t is installed turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position first After wating approximately 10 seconds turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position 2 Remove the Jammed paper 3 Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position 4 Press the Function and 3 keys Section Jam Location A...

Page 179: ...ensor ADU Entrance Sensor Registration Sensor Timing Sensor Paper Path Sensor 2nd Paper Path Sensor 1st Paper Path Sensor Intermediate Roller Sensor ADU Intermediate Sensor ADU Exit Sensor Fuser Unit Paper Exit Sensor System Console Paper Path Sensor 3rd Paper Path Sensor 4th Paper Path Sensor ADF Registration Sensor 1 ADF Exit Sensor ADF Selection Sensor ADF Registration Sensor 2 ADF Registration...

Page 180: ...th Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Paper Path Sensor is activated B J13 The 3rd Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Paper Path Sensor is activated A J14 The 4th Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Paper Path Sensor is activated A J16 The LCT Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined ...

Page 181: ... keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time during non printing mode C D J60 1 The Finisher Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after Exit Sensor is activated 2 The Finisher Registration Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time after Finisher Registration Sensor is activated 3 The Finisher Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predeterm...

Page 182: ...t ON after a predetermined time has lapsed C B J99 No VSNC Signal within a predetermined time after VRDY Signal is activated C DP 3520 3530 4520 4530 6020 6030 DP 3510 4510 6010 Contents Section J70 J70 The ADF Registration Sensor 1 does not detect paper within a predetermined time in the ADF J J71 J71 The ADF Registration Sensor 1 keeps detectiong paper after a predetermined time in the ADF J J72...

Page 183: ...tive 5 Scanning Mechanism is defective 6 DRV PCB connector is disconnected 7 DRV PCB is defective 8 SPC PCB connector is disconnected 9 SPC PCB is defective 10 LVPS is defective E1 20 Laser Unit horizontal synchronization 1 1 LSU connector is disconnected 2 LSU is defective 3 SPC PCB connector is disconnected 4 SPC PCB is defective E1 21 Laser Unit horizontal synchronization 2 1 LSU connector is d...

Page 184: ...r connector is disconnected 6 Lift Motor is defective 7 Lower Limit Sensor connector is disconnected 8 Lower Limit Sensor is defective 9 LCT PCB connector is disconnected 10 LCT PCB is defective 11 LVPS connector is disconnected 12 LVPS is defective 13 SPC PCB connector is disconnected 14 SPC PCB is defective E2 10 System Console Drive Motor rotation 1 System Console Cable is disconnected 2 Drive ...

Page 185: ...ated with Toner E3 20 Main Motor rotation 1 Drive Mechanism is defective 2 Main Motor connector is disconnected 3 Main Motor is defective 4 DRV PCB connector is disconnected 5 DRV PCB is defective 6 SPC PCB connector is disconnected 7 SPC PCB is defective 8 LVPS is defective E3 21 Dust Collection Fan Motor rotation 1 Dust Collection Fan connector is disconnected 2 Dust Collection Fan is defective ...

Page 186: ...connected 2 Cleaner Home Position Sensor 1 is defective 3 Cleaner Home Position Sensor 2 connector is disconnected 4 Cleaner Home Position Sensor 2 is defective 5 Cleaner Motor Drive Mechanism is defective 6 Corona Mechanism is defective 7 Cleaner Motor connector is disconnected 8 Cleaner Motor is defective 9 DRV PCB connector is disconnected 10 DRV PCB is defective 11 SPC PCB connector is disconn...

Page 187: ...is disconnected 9 HTC PCB is defective E4 02 Paper Jam 1 Paper Jam in Fuser Unit 2 Paper Exit Sensor 1 or 2 is disconnected 3 Paper Exit Sensor 1 or 2 is defective 4 DRV PCB connector is disconnected 5 DRV PCB is defective 6 SPC PCB connector is disconnected 7 SPC PCB is defective E4 10 Exhaust Fan Motor 1 rotation 1 Exhaust Fan connector is disconnected 2 Exhaust Fan is defective 3 LVPS connector...

Page 188: ...2 SPC PCB is defective 3 IPC PCB is disconnected 4 IPC PCB is defective 5 Finisher Interface Cable is disconnected 6 OP LVPS connector is disconnected 7 OP LVPS is defective 8 DC PCB connector is disconnected 9 Finisher is defective E5 40 Sort Memory Abnormal 1 Sort Memory defective 2 SC PCB connector is disconnected 3 SC PCB defective E5 42 Total Counter connection 1 Total Counter connector is di...

Page 189: ...Stitch Communication E7 41 Finisher Saddle Positioning Plate Motor E7 42 Finisher Saddle Folding Motor E7 43 Finisher Saddle Guide Motor E7 44 Finisher Saddle Alignment Motor E7 45 Finisher Saddle Rear Staple Motor E7 46 Finisher Saddle Front Staple Motor E7 47 Finisher Saddle Push Motor E7 48 Finisher Swing Motor E7 49 Finisher Sensor Connector E7 50 Finisher Micro Switch E7 51 Finisher Delivery ...

Page 190: ...30 6010 6020 6030 E13 Out of Toner Code Function Check Points E13 Toner Sensor 1 Toner Bottle is not installed correctly 2 Out of Toner 3 Toner Sensor is disconnected 4 Toner Sensor is defective 5 SPC PCB connector is disconnected 6 SPC PCB is defective ...

Page 191: ...m occurred SC PCB 331 XMT C 8 minutes timer error Germany only 400 XMT B T1 timer 35 5 sec elapsed without detecting 300 bps signal Wrong number is dialed and the START button is pushed Telephone line is disconnected while dialing FXB PCB Modem or MJR PCB is defective Receiver is defective It may only be transmitting CED 401 XMT B DCN was returned from receiver while transmitter is waiting for CFR...

Page 192: ... poor line quality and receiving operator requests voice contact Receiver is defective Modem MJR PCB etc FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective 410 RCV D Received DCN while waiting for post command EOP MPS EOM etc Interface or line is faulty Transmitter is defective 411 RCV Polling B Received DCN after transmitting NSC Transmitter is not ready for polling communication Password does not match between tra...

Page 193: ... Received relay transfer request or confidential document to distribute to an end receiving station or all confidential mailboxes are used 457 RELAY XMT CONF XMT POLL B Remote unit does not have Relayed XMT or Confidential Comm capability 459 RCV C Failed training in Phase C Line quality is poor Training signal is distorted due to line noise FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective 490 RCV C Sum of error l...

Page 194: ...l requested by RX side 570 RCV B Password or machine code did not match during remote diagnostic communication 571 XMT B Remote unit did not have the remote diagnostic function 580 XMT B Sub address transmission to a unit that has their DIS bit 49 NSF bit 155 OFF Sub address transmission to a unit that has no Sub address function 581 XMT B Sub address Password transmission to a unit that has their...

Page 195: ...ct SMTP Server IP Address is set No email application is activated on the Mail Server 717 XMT LAN Incomplete SMTP Protocol transmission Mail Server s hard disk may be full Mail Server is defective 718 XMT LAN Page Memory Overflow occurred while receiving printing data The paper size selected within your application to print is larger than the paper size loaded in the paper tray s Check the documen...

Page 196: ...TN The machine was requested to relay a document but has no Relay Hub capability 814 Conf XMT Conf Polling Relay Comm PSTN The remote station does not have Relay XMT nor Confidential Communication capability 815 Conf RCV PSTN Mailbox is full 816 Conf Polled PSTN The received Polling Password did not match 825 Conf RCV Conf Polled PSTN Parameter settings of the remote station are not properly set 8...

Page 197: ...git Manufacturer Code Not used defined Fax Diagnostic Codes Data Definition Manufacturer Code 0 1 Casio 2 Canon 3 Sanyo 4 Sharp 5 Tamura 6 Toshiba 7 NEC 8 Oki 9 Hitachi A Xerox B Fujitsu C Matsushita D Mitsubishi E Murata F Ricoh JOURNAL DATE MMM dd yyyy TIME 09 39 NO COMM PAGES FILE DURATION X R IDENTIFICATION DATE TIME DIAGNOSTIC 01 OK 001 129 00 00 42 XMT 123 456 789 MMM dd 01 55 C8649003C0000 ...

Page 198: ...ed Received 7 Received Received Received 8 Pressed 9 Received Pressed A Received Pressed B Received Received Pressed C Received Pressed D Received Received Pressed E Received Received Pressed F Received Received Received Pressed Fax Diagnostic Codes Data Definition Resolution dpi Paper Width 0 A4 1 S Fine A4 2 400 x 400 A4 3 300 x 300 A4 4 B4 5 S Fine B4 6 400 x 400 B4 7 300 x 300 B4 8 600 x 600 A...

Page 199: ... line Fine D Fine E Fine F 0 ms line Fine Fax Diagnostic Codes Data Definition Deferred Comm Dialing RCV Memory Non Memory 0 Manual Communication Non Memory 1 Used Manual Communication Non Memory 2 Auto Dialing Non Memory 3 Used Auto Dialing Non Memory 4 Auto RCV Non Memory 5 Used Auto RCV Non Memory 6 Remote RCV Non Memory 7 Used Remote RCV Non Memory 8 Manual Communication Memory 9 Used Manual C...

Page 200: ...Yes XMT Off Off 4 RCV On Off 5 Yes RCV On Off 6 XMT On Off 7 Yes XMT On Off 8 RCV Off On 9 Yes RCV Off On A XMT Off On B Yes XMT Off On C RCV On On D Yes RCV On On E XMT On On F Yes XMT On On Fax Diagnostic Codes Data Definition Sub Address Comm Confidential Comm Relayed Comm Turnaround Polling 0 1 Yes 2 Yes 3 Yes Yes 4 Yes 5 Yes Yes 6 Yes Yes 7 Yes Yes Yes 8 Yes 9 Yes Yes A Yes Yes B Yes Yes Yes ...

Page 201: ...eck Call 3 4 Memory Transfer 5 6 7 8 Yes 9 Report XMT Yes A Check Call Yes B Yes C Memory Transfer Yes D Yes E Yes F Yes Fax Diagnostic Codes Data Definition Short Protocol Standard Non Standard 0 Standard 1 Standard 2 Standard 3 Standard 4 Standard 5 Standard 6 Standard 7 Standard 8 Non Standard 9 B Non Standard A Non Standard B D Non Standard C Non Standard D B Non Standard E Non Standard F D No...

Page 202: ...ed defined Fax Diagnostic Codes Data Definition Coding ECM 0 MH 1 MR 2 MMR 3 JBIG 4 5 6 7 8 MH Yes 9 MR Yes A MMR Yes B JBIG Yes C Yes D Yes E Yes F Yes Fax Diagnostic Codes Data Definition Symbol Rate V 34 V 34 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2400 sr Yes 9 Yes A 2800 sr Yes B 3000 sr Yes C 3200 sr Yes D 3429 sr Yes E Yes F Yes ...

Page 203: ...finition Modem Speed Modem Speed V 34 0 2400 bps 1 4800 bps 2400 bps 2 7200 bps 4800 bps 3 9600 bps 7200 bps 4 TC 7200 bps 9600 bps 5 TC 9600 bps 12000 bps 6 12000 bps 14400 bps 7 14400 bps 16800 bps 8 19200 bps 9 21600 bps A 24000 bps B 26400 bps C 28800 bps D 31200 bps E 33600 bps F Fax Diagnostic Codes Data Definition 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F ...

Page 204: ...onic Device Increase the Page Margins in the application The Panasonic Device requires minimum margins of inches 5 mm on all sides The font type is incorrect Check if the selected font is installed in the PC Check if the selected font is being replaced with a proper printer font in the Font Substitution Table of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box Select Always useTrueType fonts from the Font...

Page 205: ...se an error is found in the current printer setting Verify and specify the paper size or orientation to coincide with the application and the printer driver settings Error Message The available Sort Memory in the Panasonic Device may not be enough to complete the print job Either install an optional Sort Memory or change the resolution to 300 dpi in the Printer Driver Properties dialog box The pri...

Page 206: ...rvice Mode Item Function F1 Self Test 00 CCD Test This test is used for checking the CCD 01 LCD LED Test This test is used for checking the LCD and LEDs 02 Page Memory Test This test is used for checking the Page Memory 03 Print Test Pattern 1 Prints the pattern for setting the Paper position alignment 04 Print Test Pattern 2 Prints the Slant pattern for setting the Paper position alignment 05 Pri...

Page 207: ...OICE F5 66 Interleaving default Blank F5 17 Paper size tray4 sys2 None F5 67 Page insertion default Blank F5 18 Paper size L LCT LETTER F5 68 Cover mode default F Blank F5 19 F5 69 Reduce N in 1 space No F5 20 ADF Auto F5 70 PM cycle F5 21 Finisher Auto F5 71 F5 22 System console Auto F5 72 Disable at web PM Continue F6 00 Adjust 100 read s s 0 F6 50 T P mode image density 0 F6 01 Adjust 100 read ...

Page 208: ...CUMENT FEEDER iADF Yes 3rd PAPER FEED MODULE Yes 4th PAPER FEED MODULE Yes LCT Yes FINISHER FS605 PUNCH UNIT Yes FAX BOARD Yes NETWORK SCANNER Yes PCL PRINTER Yes PS PRINTER Yes IPX SPX Yes EMAIL Yes DDS Yes HDD Yes 5 ERROR LOG TOTAL PRINT COUNT 2082 NO DATE TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT NO DATE TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT 01 MMM dd yyyy 11 11 J27 XX 00000008 02 MMM dd yyyy 11 31 J41 XX 00000140 See...

Page 209: ...veloper count 295 Corona cleaning count 295 Ave print drum rise up 0 Total opc rotation time 0 Ave sec drum rise up 0 F7 03 Paper feed count Sheet bypass count 147 1st Paper tray count 90 2nd Paper tray count 0 3rd Paper tray count 0 4th Paper tray count 0 LCT tray count 0 2 sided count 28 A4 LT count 284 A4R LTR count 73 A3 LDG count 19 B4 LGL count 0 F7 04 Scanner count ADF count 26 ADF read cou...

Page 210: ...nput Check No Function Condition Message Display Remarks 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 000 Paper Path Sensor Paper is detected 0 Intermediate Roller Sensor Paper is detected 0 Fuser Unit Paper Exit Sensor Paper is detected 0 Inverting Exit Sensor Paper is detected 0 Timing Sensor Paper is detected 0 Registration Sensor Paper is detected 0 001 Size Sensor 3 Sheet Bypass Sensor is activated 1 Size Sensor 2 Sheet ...

Page 211: ... Path Sensor 1st Paper Tray Paper is detected 0 Upper Limit Sensor 1st Paper Tray Upper Limit is detected 1 NP Sensor 1st Paper Tray Paper is not detected 1 Paper Remaining Sensor 3 1st Paper Tray Sensor is activated 1 Paper Remaining Sensor 2 1st Paper Tray Sensor is activated 1 Paper Remaining Sensor 1 1st Paper Tray Sensor is activated 1 Paper Path Sensor 2nd Paper Tray Paper is detected 0 004 ...

Page 212: ... Container Detection Sensor Toner Waste Container is detected 0 Suction Fan Lock Signal Normal 0 008 Power Supply Fan Lock Signal Normal 0 Ozone Fan 2 Lock Signal Normal 0 Exhaust Fan 3 Lock Signal Normal 0 009 Cover Open Close Sensor System Console Cover is open 1 Paper Path Sensor 4th Paper Tray Paper is detected 0 Upper Limit Sensor 4th Paper Tray Upper Limit is detected 1 NP Sensor 4th Paper T...

Page 213: ...h Sensor LCT Paper is detected 0 012 Paper Remaining Sensor 3 LCT Sensor is activated 1 Paper Remaining Sensor 2 LCT Sensor is activated 1 Paper Remaining Sensor 1 LCT Sensor is activated 1 013 Upper Paper Path Sensor Paper is detected 1 2 Bin Saddle Stitch Finisher FS605 Only Paper Tray Sensor Paper is detected 1 Front Stapler Home Position Sensor Home position is detected 1 Rear Stapler Home Pos...

Page 214: ...ion Sensor Home position is detected 1 Punch Unit Sensor Punch Unit is detected 0 018 Rocking Guide Open Sensor Guide is open 1 Shutter Open Sensor Shutter is open 1 Tray Unit Home Position Sensor Home position is detected 1 Collation Home Position Sensor Home position is detected 0 Stapler Home Position Sensor Home position is detected 0 Push Switch 2 Switch is ON 1 Push Switch 3 Switch is ON 1 0...

Page 215: ... Detecting Signal 24V Line is OFF 1 022 029 Not Used 030 ADF B1 Sensor Original is detected 1 ADF B2 Sensor Original is detected 1 ADF B3 Sensor Original is detected 1 ADF Inverting Sensor Original is detected 1 ADF Paper Exit Detection Sensor Original is detected 1 ADF Cover Open Detection Sensor Cover is open 1 ADF Detection Sensor ADF is not detected 1 031 ADF Original Sensor Original is detect...

Page 216: ...ust Fan 3 rotates 057 Power Supply Fan When CN758 12 is 24V Power Supply Fan rotates 058 Not Used 059 Separator Solenoid When CN764 2 signal level changes to 0V from 24V solenoid operates 060 Mg Roller Clutch When CN764 4 signal level changes to 0V from 24V clutch operates 061 Registration Clutch When CN716 6 signal level changes to 0V from 24V clutch operates 1 minute 062 Total Counter When CN768...

Page 217: ... to 0V from 5V motor rotates 080 Paper Feed Roller Clutch 4th Paper Tray When CN608 3 signal level changes to 0V from 24V clutch operates 1 minute 081 Paper Feed Solenoid 4th Paper Tray When CN608 4 signal level changes to 0V from 24V solenoid operates 2 seconds 082 Lift Motor 4th Paper Tray When CN604 2 signal level changes to 0V from 24V motor rotates in the ascending direction 083 084 Not Used ...

Page 218: ...ly 109 Tray Elevator Unit Test 1 Tray moves to Upward direction 2 Bin Finisher FS600 2 Bin Saddle Stitch Finisher FS605 and 2 Bin Finisher FS330 110 Tray Elevator Unit Test 2 Tray moves to Home Position 111 Paper Feed Unit Test Feed Motor turns ON 112 Paper Exit Unit Test Feed Motor turns ON 2 Bin Finisher FS600 2 Bin Saddle Stitch Finisher FS605 and 1 Bin Saddle Stitch Finisher FS355A 113 Collati...

Page 219: ... 4 signal level changes to 0V from 24V clutch operates for 3 seconds 168 ADF Registration Roller 2 Clutch When CN656 2 signal level changes to 0V from 24V clutch operates for 3 seconds 169 ADF Inverting Roller 1 Clutch When CN659 6 signal level changes to 0V from 24V clutch operates for 3 seconds 170 ADF Inverting Roller 2 Clutch When CN659 7 signal level changes to 0V from 24V clutch operates for...

Page 220: ...y and touch the OK button When the C CLEAR key is touched the selected code input will not be accepted Press FUNCTION and C CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the service mode Reboot the machine after setting the parameter s to activate the setting s F5 Mode No Item Function Default Setting 00 Country Version 0 Japan 1 USA CAN 2 Europe 3 Other Country Dependent 01 Frequency Desired 0 Auto 1 50 Hz 2...

Page 221: ...atch Printing Mode From March 2004 MP 0 Off 1 On 1 09 Fuser Lamp Control 0 Off 1 Auto 0 for USA Canada 1 for Europe 10 11 Not Used 12 Printer Fan Extension 0 None 2 2 min 5 5 min 5 13 Paper Out Red Indicator 0 Off 1 On 1 14 Paper Size Tray 1 Copier 0 None 3 A4 5 B5 13 LETTER 13 for USA Canada 3 for Europe 15 Paper Size Tray 2 Copier 0 None 1 A3 2 B4 3 A4 4 A4R 5 B5 6 B5R 7 A5 9 8 x 13 10 8 5 x 13 ...

Page 222: ...ope 19 Not Used 20 ADF 0 No 1 Auto 1 21 Finisher 0 No 1 Auto 1 22 System Console 0 No 1 Auto 1 23 LCT 0 No 1 Auto 1 24 QUANTUM TDC Adj Level 0 No 1 Low 2 Medium 3 High 1 From July 25 Digital QUANTUM 0 Off 1 On 1 26 2 Sided Unit 0 No 1 Auto 1 27 Output Bin Copy For DA FS600 605 only 0 Upper 1 Bottom 0 28 Output Bin Printer For DA FS600 605 only same as F5 27 1 29 Output Bin FAX EMAIL For DA FS600 6...

Page 223: ... for Other Destinations 1 41 Count Up Timing 0 At feed 1 At exit 1 42 KEY DEPT Counter 0 No 1 Key Cnt 2 DEPT 3 Card 0 43 Key Counter Timing Same as F5 41 0 44 Insert Paper Count 0 No 1 Yes 0 45 Dept Code Re entry Again 0 Yes 1 No 0 46 Hole Punch Type 0 2 hole 1 3 hole 2 4 hole 1 for USA Canada 2 for Europe 47 TH Sensor Tr DT 0 No 1 Mid 2 Large 1 48 TH Sensor DEV 0 No 1 Mid 2 Large 1 49 Auto Contra...

Page 224: ... 30 mm 1 58 Toner Waste Container Full Alarm 0 Stop 1 3 K 2 5 K 3 8 K 4 10 K 2 59 Add Toner Alarm 0 Stop 1 Continue 0 60 Auto Tray Selection 0 No 1 Yes 1 61 62 Not Used 63 U13 Clear 0 Any keys 1 Func 1 0 64 Dept Counter SCANNER 0 Yes 1 No 0 65 Dept Counter PRINTER 0 Yes 1 No 0 66 Interleaving Default 0 Blank 1 Copy 0 67 Page Insertion Default 0 Blank 1 Copy 0 68 Cover Mode Default 0 F Blank 1 F Co...

Page 225: ...inue 1 Stop 1 73 PM Fuser Web 0 120 K 1 240 K 1 74 Fuser Web Feeding 0 1 10 1 1 20 2 1 30 1 75 76 Not Used 77 Text Error Diffusion 0 Errordif 1 Multilvl 0 78 A4 LTR Size Select 0 No 1 Yes 0 79 Not Used 80 Paper Size Priority 1 A3 2 B4 3 A4 4 A4R 5 B5 6 B5R 8 A5 9 8 x 13 10 8 5 x 13 11 LEDGER 12 LEGAL 13 LETTER 14 LETTER R 15 INVOICE 13 for USA Canada 3 for Europe 81 B4 FLS Size Selection 0 B4 1 8 ...

Page 226: ...t size for Manual Skyshot Mode M1 and M2 70 x 160 92 M2 Size 95 x 220 93 94 Not Used 95 Paper Size FA Factory use only 0 Japan 1 USA CAN 2 Europe 3 Other 1 for USA Canada 2 for Europe 96 Bypass Detection Factory use only 0 Japan 1 USA CAN 2 Europe 3 Other 1 for USA Canada 2 for Europe 97 Bp tray B4 FLS LGL FA Factory use only 0 B4 1 8 x 13 2 8 5 x 13 3 LEGAL 3 for USA Canada 0 for Europe 98 Tray2 ...

Page 227: ...l position when scan is made 9 9 0 1 01 Adjust read mag l t Adjustment of ratio for parallel position when scan is made 9 9 0 1 02 100 selection Adjustment from 99 1 to 100 9 9 9 0 1 03 Original registration Adjustment of platen original registration detection timing 30 30 0 2mm 04 Printer registration Delay time is adjusted from registration roller clutch ON 50 50 0 5mm 05 Main motor speed Adjust...

Page 228: ...26 26 19 5mV 27 Bias Frequency Factory use only AC Bias frequency adjustment 2 2 1KHz 28 Quantum white density Adjustment of standard white density level Should not be adjusted in the field and must be set to 0 99 99 29 Quantum black density Adjustment of standard black density level Should not be adjusted in the field and must be set to 0 99 99 30 Laser power adj 2 level Laser power compensation ...

Page 229: ...U 99 99 53 CCD read position adj Adjustment of CCD read position 42 44 0 2mm 54 T mode contrast 127 127 55 T P mode contrast 127 127 56 P mode contrast 127 127 57 Sep DC Volt 1 Sided Compensation of Detach DC voltage for 1 sided copy 20 30 10V 58 Sep AC Volt 1 Sided Compensation of Detach AC voltage for 1 sided copy 6 8 100V 59 Sep DC Volt 2 Sided Compensation of Detach DC voltage for 2 sided copy...

Page 230: ...stop position Adjustment of ADF reverse stop position 99 99 0 3mm 87 ADF exhaust stop position Adjustment of ADF exit stop position 99 99 0 3mm 88 ADF feed regist 1 sided Adjustment of ADF pick up for 1 sided 99 99 0 3mm 89 ADF feed regist 2 sided Adjustment of ADF pick up for 2 sided 99 99 0 3mm 90 ADF read position Main scan Adjustment of ADF horizontal image read start position 99 99 0 05mm 91 ...

Page 231: ...ID Code Key Operator s identification code for access to the counter mode 02 Maintenance Count 00 Total Count Total count for all copies prints 01 PM Count Preventive Maintenance count 02 Scanner PM Count PM count for scanner readings 03 ADF Count PM count of originals fed through the ADF 04 Not Used 05 OPC Drum Count PM count of recording paper fed through the OPC Drum 06 Process Unit Count PM co...

Page 232: ...R Count Total count of A4 R Letter R Print 09 A3 Ledger Count Total count of A3 Ledger Print 10 B4 Legal Count Total count of B4 Legal Print 04 Scanner Count 00 ADF Count Total count of originals fed through the ADF 01 ADF Read Count Total count of originals scanned through the ADF 02 Scanner Count Total count of scanning operations 03 Scanner Read Count Total count of scanner readings 05 Copy Cou...

Page 233: ...ced b To return the optical system to the home position press the CLEAR key 01 05 Not Used 06 Error Log Print View a Each time the arrow button is pressed the machine errors or paper jam codes stored in memory are displayed beginning with the oldest code Note Only the 30 most recent codes are displayed 07 Error Log Clear a Press the Reset key A Message Error code can be cleared with the Start key ...

Page 234: ... numerical key input Note The locking operation is automatically reset when the Power switch is turned ON again 20 TDC sensor output adj Adjustment of TDC sensor 21 Not Used 22 LSU PWM Pattern 3 Factory use only Print out the Test Pattern 3 23 LSU PWM Pattern 4 Factory use only Print out the Test Pattern 4 24 46 Not Used 47 ADF continuous test Press START key to begin 48 Platen cont Test Press STA...

Page 235: ...umber when a machine malfunction occurs 02 Firmware Version 00 SC Displays the firmware version for SC 01 SC boot Displays the firmware version for SC Boot 02 PNL Displays the firmware version for PNL 03 SPC Displays the firmware version for SPC 04 Finisher Displays the firmware version for finisher 05 FAX Modem Displays the firmware version for FAX option 1 06 Not Used 07 SC2 Displays the firmwar...

Page 236: ...the firmware in the machine with the Parallel Port 08 Program Backup Refer to Sect 3 6 00 Main Onboard F ROM 4MB 01 Option 1 all Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 8MB 02 Option 1 a Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 4MB a 03 Option 1 b Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 4MB b 04 Option 2 all Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 8MB 05 Option 2 a Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 4MB a 06 Option 2 b Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 4MB b 09 Update Program Card Creates a Master Firmware Card using the Firmwar...

Page 237: ...rvice Mode Table The following service modes are provided to assist you in setting operational functions of the unit and determining the condition of the unit No Service Mode Description 00 Not Used 01 Function Parameter Setting Allows changes to the function parameters the home position etc 02 RAM Edit Mode Factory use only 03 Print Parameter List Report Prints the Function Parameter List Page Me...

Page 238: ...IAL Start to TX automatically 001 ALARM STATUS 1 OFF 2 Timer 6 sec 3 Constant Selects the No Paper or No Toner alarm status OFF Alarm is disabled Timer Alarm will shut off after 6 seconds Constant Alarm will not stop until STOP is pressed or the error is cleared corrected 002 STOP COMM JRNL 1 Off 2 On Selects whether the machine prompts to print the COMM Journal when the printout condition is set ...

Page 239: ... the following suffix Destinations The Fax Firmware is automatically loaded with the Host Firmware PB UK PF France PG Switzerland PK China PM Germany PT Taiwan PU USA PEU UK 006 ID DISPLAY 1 Number Numeric ID 2 Chara Character ID Selects the priority of displaying the ID 007 JRNL COLUMN 1 Station 2 RCV D ID Selects the contents of the ID to display on the Journal 008 MONITOR 1 Off 2 On Selects whe...

Page 240: ...TC7200 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps Note This parameter is applicable only when communicating with regular G3 machines When communicating with Super G3 V 34 machines use Parameter No 33 019 ITU T V 34 1 Off 2 On 3 Select Selects whether the ITU T V 34 is Off On or Select Select Select whether the ITU T V 34 is Off or On when entering Phone Book Dialing Numbers or Manual Number Dialing 020 ITU T ECM 1 O...

Page 241: ...000 2800 2400 sr Press V or to select the symbol rate 035 V34 RX SYMBOL RATE 2400 3429sr Selects receiving symbol rate for V 34 3429 3429 3200 3000 2800 2400 sr Press V or to select the symbol rate 036 Not Used 037 PROTOCOL DISPLAY 1 Off not displayed 2 On displayed Selects whether to display the modem speed during communication Press the Job Status Key to display 038 Not Used 039 FLASH TIME 5 50 ...

Page 242: ...cept for USA and Canada 1 Off 2 On Selects whether to detect Dial Tone before dialing the telephone number 057 DC LOOP CHECK Except for USA and Canada 1 Off 2 On Selects whether the unit checks the DC Loop during communication 058 COMM JRNL IMAGE 1 Off without image 2 On with image Selects whether the machine prints the COMM Journal with image 059 CONFIDENTIAL RCV REPORT 1 Off does not print out 2...

Page 243: ...N PIN Available if No 73 Error Detect is set to RATE See Note 2 072 CONTINUOUS ERROR 1 Off unlimited 2 3 lines STD 3 6 lines STD 4 12 lines STD Selects the continuous total error criteria of Off 3 6 or 12 lines in Standard mode If continuous total error exceeds this setting the unit will transmit RTN PIN Available if No 73 Error Detect is set to RATE 073 ERROR DETECT 1 Lines 2 Rate Selects the err...

Page 244: ...of original registration detection timing 103 TRAIL EDGE READ TIMING 9 0 Adjustment of trail edge void 104 109 Not Used 110 MAC ADDRESS Indicates the MAC Address 111 Not Used 112 INSERT EMAIL TXT 1 Off 2 On Selects whether the Text Template email message is programmable and added on all email sent in the message body above the top line of text Up to 40 characters Programmed in the User Parameters ...

Page 245: ...rror Transmit condition of RTP PIP or RTN PIN Note 4 The default setting of parameters depends on the country s specifications or regulations Print the Function Parameter List to confirm the default settings 116 OVERWRITE WARNING 1 Yes 2 No Selects whether the Overwrite Warning is included on the Internet FAX Result Receipt when programming the Auto Dialer via email 117 121 Not Used 122 LDAP 1 Off...

Page 246: ...ument File Protocol Trace and the Toner Order Form 5 2 4 1 Function Parameter List A list of all Function Parameters can be printed by the following procedure Select the 03 Print Param List Report on the Touch Panel display Select the 01 Function Parameter List on the Touch Panel display Touch the YES button to print Function Parameter List Touch the OK button 3 times Press FUNCTION and C CLEAR ke...

Page 247: ...QL 0dB 0dB 064 015 065 016 066 017 TX START 14400bps 14400bps 067 018 RX START 14400bps 14400bps 068 NYSE FAX FORWARD Off Off 019 ITU T V 34 On On 069 NYSE LOCAL PRINT Inc Inc 020 ITU T ECM On On 070 LINE ERROR 128 128 021 EP TONE Off Off 071 TOTAL ERROR 10 10 022 SIG INTERVAL 500ms 500ms 072 CONTI ERROR Off Off 023 TCF CHECK Normal Normal 073 ERROR DETECT Rate Rate 024 CED FREQ 2100Hz 2100Hz 074 ...

Page 248: ...nt Param List Report on the Touch Panel display Select the 03 Page Memory Test on the Touch Panel display Touch the YES button to print a test pattern Touch the OK button 3 times Press FUNCTION and C CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the service mode MEMORY SIZE 2MB TX RX PRT CPY 000123 000456 000789 000333 MAC ADDRESS 08002300AB5F SHIPMENT SET SC BOOT M30 PNL AAT00001PU SPC 60cpm T40000 FINISHER ...

Page 249: ...e OK button 3 times Press FUNCTION and C CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the service mode PRINTER REPORT DATE MMM dd yyyy TIME 19 02 LAST PRINT ERROR MMM dd yyyy 15 38 J00 00 00000016 CUSTOMER ID 1234567890123456 PNL AAT00001PU SPC 60cpm T40000 TRANSMIT COUNTER 000475 RECEIVE COUNTER 000398 COPY COUNTER 000083 PRINT COUNTER 000016 01 MMM dd yyyy 15 38 J00 00 00000016 02 MMM dd yyyy 10 48 J02 00 ...

Page 250: ...ocument files from the Flash Memory Select the 03 Print Param List Report on the Touch Panel display Select the 05 All Document Files on the Touch Panel display Touch the YES button to print All Document Files Touch the OK button 3 times Press FUNCTION and C CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the service mode ...

Page 251: ...tton to print a Protocol Trace Report Touch the OK button 3 times Press FUNCTION and C CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the service mode PROTOCOL LOG REPORT DATE MMM dd yyyy TIME 16 56 STATUS OK MODE ECM TX STANDARD SPEED 9600bps 0MS L REMOTE CAPA DIS 00 CE B9 C4 80 12 LOCAL CAPA TSI 2B 20 20 20 38 37 2B 2B 2B 2B 39 38 36 36 35 34 37 38 38 30 DCS 00 C6 F8 44 REMOTE NSF CSI DIS CFR COMMAND LOG LOC...

Page 252: ...e printed out manually by the following procedure Select the 03 Print Param List Report on the Touch Panel display Select the 07 Toner Order Form on the Touch Panel display Touch the YES button to print a Toner Order Form Touch the OK button 3 times Press FUNCTION and C CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the service mode ...

Page 253: ...G DP 3520 3530 4520 4530 DQ TU35D DP 6010 DQ TU351G DP 6020 6030 The order number s may differ depending on the Model and the Destination TONER BOTTLE ORDER FORM The toner supply in your machine is running low 1 To order a replacement Bottle from your Authorized Dealer Panasonic Corp 2 by Phone 1 201 111 5555 3 by Fax 1 201 111 4444 4 Thank you for your order Customer Name and Address Ship to Bill...

Page 254: ...t the 04 MODEM Tests on the Touch Panel display Select the 01 Binary Signal on the Touch Panel display Select the desired parameter on the Touch Panel display and touch the CLOSE button Touch the OK button 3 times Press FUNCTION and C CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the service mode Binary Signal Table Number Signals 1 V21 300bps 2 V27ter 2400bps 3 V27ter 4800bps 4 V29 7200bps 5 V29 9600bps 6 V1...

Page 255: ... procedure Select the 04 MODEM Tests on the Touch Panel display Select the 02 Tonal Signal on the Touch Panel display Select the desired parameter on the Touch Panel display and touch the CLOSE button Touch the OK button 3 times Press FUNCTION and C CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the service mode Tonal Signal Table Number Signals 1 462 Hz 2 1080 Hz 3 1100 Hz 4 1300 Hz 5 1650 Hz 6 1850 Hz 7 2100...

Page 256: ...display Select the desired parameter on the Touch Panel display and touch the CLOSE button Touch the OK button 3 times Press FUNCTION and C CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the service mode DTMF Single Tone Table DTMF Dual Tone Table Number DTMF Signal Tones 1 697 Hz 2 770 Hz 3 852 Hz 4 941 Hz 5 1209 Hz 6 1336 Hz 7 1477 Hz 8 1633 Hz Number DTMF Dual Tones 0 941 Hz 1336 Hz 1 697 Hz 1209 Hz 2 697 H...

Page 257: ... 3000 sr 19200 bps 47 V34 3000 sr 19200 bps 06 V34 2400 sr 14400 bps 27 V34 3000 sr 21600 bps 48 V34 3429 sr 16800 bps 07 V34 2400 sr 16800 bps 28 V34 3000 sr 24000 bps 49 V34 3429 sr 19200 bps 08 V34 2400 sr 19200 bps 29 V34 3000 sr 26400 bps 50 V34 3429 sr 21600 bps 09 V34 2400 sr 21600 bps 30 V34 3000 sr 28800 bps 51 V34 3429 sr 24000 bps 10 V34 2800 sr 4800 bps 31 V34 3200 sr 4800 bps 52 V34 3...

Page 258: ...alization Table No Initialize Mode Description 01 Parameter Initialize Restores the Fax and Function Parameters to default values Note Turn the Power Switch to the OFF and back to the ON position to enable the parameter settings 02 Journal Clear Clears the Journal contents 03 Auto Dial Clear Clears the One touch ABBR Numbers and Phone Books 04 Program Dial Clear Clears the Program keys 05 LOGO ID ...

Page 259: ...uch the OK button 3 times Press FUNCTION and C CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the service mode 5 2 7 2 Printer Reports Conditions under which a report can be printed or transmitted 1 Manual Print The Printer Report can be printed by Service Mode 3 See Sect 5 2 4 3 2 Automatic Transmission Printout a Service Alert Report When the unit detects an Emergency Printer Error the unit will immediately ...

Page 260: ...Service Alert Report M Maintenance Alert Report Error Code Log Tx Report Remarks Ex xx O S Refer to the Mechanical Error Code E Code Table Sect 4 5 3 E13 O Out of Toner Jxx O Refer to the Jam Error Code J Code Table Sect 4 5 2 Uxx Refer to the User Error Code U Code Table Sect 4 5 1 U13 O M Low Toner ...

Page 261: ...nt 0 OPC Drum Count 13 B4 LEGAL Count 0 Process Unit Count 13 ADF PM Count 1 F7 04 ADF Count 1 Fuser Web Count 240986 ADF Read Count 1 Developer Count 13 Scanner Count 9 Corona Cleaning Count 13 Scanner Read Count 9 Avg Print Drum Rise Up 1 00 Total OPC Rotation Time 0 03 F7 05 Copy Print Count 3 Avg Sec Drum Rise Up 0 01 Copy Scan Count 4 F7 03 Sheet Bypass Count 0 F7 06 PC Print Count 0 1st Pape...

Page 262: ...sion 4 Transmission Reception Copy Print Counters 5 Serial Number DP 3520 3530 4520 4530 6020 6030 Only DATE MMM dd yyyy TIME 12 00 MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT LAST PRINT ERROR MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER SERIAL NUMBER 01234567890 1 5 CUSTOMER ID ABC COMPANY 2 FIRMWARE VERSION 3 4 TRANSMIT COUNTER 000244 RECEIVE COUNTER 000082 COPY COUNTER 000000 PRINT COUNTER 000000 LOGO PANASONIC CHARACTER ID 3...

Page 263: ...4510 DQ TU241G DP 3520 3530 4520 4530 DQ TU35D DP 6010 DQ TU351G DP 6020 6030 The order number s may differ depending on the Model and the Destination TONER BOTTLE ORDER FORM The toner supply in your machine is running low 1 To order a replacement Bottle from your Authorized Dealer Panasonic Corp 2 by Phone 1 201 111 5555 3 by Fax 1 201 111 4444 4 Thank you for your order Customer Name and Address...

Page 264: ...ER Count 0 OPC Drum Count 13 B4 LEGAL Count 0 Process Unit Count 13 ADF PM Count 1 F7 04 ADF Count 1 Fuser Web Count 240986 ADF Read Count 1 Developer Count 13 Scanner Count 9 Corona Cleaning Count 13 Scanner Read Count 9 Avg Print Drum Rise Up 1 00 Total OPC Rotation Time 0 03 F7 05 Copy Print Count 3 Avg Sec Drum Rise Up 0 01 Copy Scan Count 4 F7 03 Sheet Bypass Count 0 F7 06 PC Print Count 0 1s...

Page 265: ...01 Send RCV D File The display changes to the Fax Mode Select the desired Fax number Press START key to send the Fax After the transmission the machine returns to the Stand by Mode Note If the File is NOT in the machine it is not functioned Touch the OK button 3 times Press FUNCTION and C CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the service mode System Maintenance Table No Maintenance Mode Description 01...

Page 266: ...Lamp Transfer Separation Fusing Cleaning Primary Charge Image Exposure Developing Drum Surface Approximately 750V DC Charge Corona Drum Latent Charge Image Illumination Magnetic Doctor Blade Gap 0 6 0 7 mm Roller Bias 550 V Latent Charge Image Discharge Lamp Heat Roller Fuser Lamp Paper Pressure Roller Latent Image Transfer Charge DC Cleaning Blade Drum Toner Paper Separation Charge AC Photo Elect...

Page 267: ...spill toner or developer on a table or floor when adding toner or developer in the developer unit discard what was spilled Such supplies may damage the drum as well as cause other image problems 3 Do not place into other containers Toner and developer must not be placed into other containers as some containers may change the characteristics of the supplies Vinyl chloride potentially changes the ch...

Page 268: ...on the skin should be washed off with soapy water Toner stuck on clothing must be removed while in a dry state with a vacuum cleaner brush or by beating then by washing with soapy water Wiping off with benzine alcohol or thinner is not recommended as it may partially melt the components of toner resulting in a stain and spot Toner spills must be removed with a vacuum cleaner and then wiped with a ...

Page 269: ...proved with additional Sensors Parameters and Software The following diagram illustrates this New System Control Point High Density Ideal Curve Middle Density Printer Density Data 255 0 0 35 1 3 Image Density ID Humidity 5 Humidity Sensor Temperature 5 Temperature Sensor Image Density Sensors Electronic Pattern Halftone Black Drum Black White Grid Voltage 1 Feedback of QUANTUM Grid Voltage Laser P...

Page 270: ...also controlled with the Long Run Operation Compensation Parameter activated by the Timer Counter 2 every 1k sheet interval 3 Developer Compensation The Toner Density is also controlled with Developer Compensation Parameter activated by the Timer Counter 3 when reaching the 150k 180k and 210k sheet count 4 Initialization The Developer Parameter is initialized by the Timer Counter 4 when the machin...

Page 271: ...tton is pressed the ADF Motor 1 925 starts to rotate and drive the Pickup Roller 511 The 1st original is fed into the Paper Feed Roller 508 and the Separation Roller 610 with the Torque Limiter Assembly preventing multiple feeding 4 Transmission and Ejection The original is fed into the Registration Roller 1 817 and when the original actuates the Registration Sensor 2 401 the Paper Feed Roller 508...

Page 272: ...rse rotation of the ADF Motor 1 925 pulls the original back around the Registration Roller 1 817 and proceeds to scan the Back side of the original 3 Eject by Reverse Rotation After the Back is scanned the original is transported through the Selection Guide 1 815 through the Selection Guide 2 713 and is carried beyond the Inverting Roller 809 and lower Pinch Rollers 626 into the Sub Tray 416 again...

Page 273: ... SW ACNRLB AC Power Supply ACSW Fuser Relay ADCLK FIFO Clock ADFRRSN1 Registration Sensor 1 Signal ADUCRRSN ADU Intermediate Sensor Signal ADUINSN ADU Sensor Signal ADURRSN ADU Registration Sensor Signal ADXSN Inverting Path Sensor Detection Signal AFDIN FIFO Data Out AFDOUT FIFO Data In AFENB FIFO Enable AFLD FIFO Load AFLTH FIFO Latch AMMCLK ADF Main Motor Clock APMCLK ADF Paper Feed Motor Clock...

Page 274: ...el Clamp Switch Signal BMA Toner Bottle Motor A Clock BMAB Toner Bottle Motor AB Clock BMB Toner Bottle Motor B Clock BMBB Toner Bottle Motor BB Clock BPSN Toner Bottle Position Sensor Signal CDSN1 Density Sensor 1 Signal CDSN2 Density Sensor 2 Signal CHPSN1 Cleaner Home Position Sensor 1 Signal CHPSN2 Cleaner Home Position Sensor 2 Signal CLIPIN AFE Sample Hold Clamp Signal CLMM1 Corona Wire Clea...

Page 275: ... Control Signal EXFM2 Exit Fan 2 Control Signal EXFM3 Exit Fan 3 Control Signal EXSN Paper Exit Sensor Detection Signal FULP1 AC Power Supply FULP2 AC Power Supply FULP3 AC Power Supply GND Ground GOPSW1 Developer Missing Detection GREFCNT Grid Reference PWM HEATL AC Power Supply HFCL Sheet Bypass Clutch Control Signal HFSOL Sheet Bypass Solenoid Control Signal HPESN Sheet Bypass Sensor Detection ...

Page 276: ...nal LCLUM1 Lift Motor Control Signal 1 LCLUM2 Lift Motor Control Signal 2 LCMA Motor A Signal LCMAB Motor AB Signal LCMB Motor B Signal LCMBB Motor BB Signal LCRRSN Paper Path Sensor Signal LCSDSN Set Sensor Signal LCSOL Paper Feed Solenoid 1 Control Signal LLBSN Upper Limit Sensor Signal LLUM 1st Tray Lift Up Motor Control Signal LMA Scan Motor A Signal LMAB Scan Motor AB Signal LMB Scan Motor B ...

Page 277: ...al nADFSES ADF Document Detect nATT Attention Signal nAUTFD Auto Feed Signal nCTON Ring Detection Signal nDUACK ADU Printer ACK Signal nDUPRNT ADU Print Request Signal nERROR Error Signal nFAXRST FAX Board Reset Signal nGARST CCD PCB Reset Signal nHKOF External Phone Off Hook Detection Signal nLD1 Laser 1 Control Signal nLD2 Laser 2 Control Signal nLPOW1 Not Used nLPOW2 Not Used nPACK Printer ACK ...

Page 278: ... Original Size Sensor Signal 1 ORSIZ3 Original Size Sensor Signal 2 ORSIZ4 Original Size Sensor Signal 3 ORSIZ5 Original Size Sensor Signal 4 OZFL2 Ozone Fan Lock Detection Signal OZFM2 Ozone Fan Control Signal P12CNT Exit Fan Control Signal PASN Platen Cover Open Sensor Signal pBDA Print BDA Signal pBDB Print BDB Signal pBUSY Busy Signal PCCL Intermediate Clutch Control Signal pCMLD Line Switchin...

Page 279: ...l PMB Paper Feed Motor B Signal PMBB Paper Feed Motor BB Signal PMCLK Polygon Motor Clock PMCNT Polygon Motor Control Signal PMLOCK Polygon Motor Lock Signal PNLDO1 Panel F ROM Rewrite Serial Data PNLSCLK1 Panel F ROM Rewrite Serial Clock POWSW POW SW pPRXD Reception Data Signal PPSOLCNT Pinch Solenoid Control Signal pPTXD Transmission Data Signal PR1SN Registration Sensor 1 Signal pSELECT Paper S...

Page 280: ...eparation Solenoid Control Signal SH A Sample Hold Signal A SH B Sample Hold Signal B SIZE1SN Original Size Sensor 1 Detection Signal SIZE2SN Original Size Sensor 2 Detection Signal SIZE3SN Original Size Sensor 3 Detection Signal SIZE4SN Original Size Sensor 4 Detection Signal SPCRXD SPC Reception Data Signal SPCTXD SPC Transmission Data Signal SPPSN System Paper Path Sensor Signal SSA1 Fuser Lamp...

Page 281: ...ining Sensor a Signal Upper ZNSN1b Paper Remaining Sensor b Signal Upper ZNSN1c Paper Remaining Sensor c Signal Upper ZNSN2a Paper Remaining Sensor a Signal Lower ZNSN2b Paper Remaining Sensor b Signal Lower ZNSN2c Paper Remaining Sensor c Signal Lower ZNSNa Paper Remaining Sensor a ZNSNb Paper Remaining Sensor b ZNSNc Paper Remaining Sensor c Signal Name Function ...

Page 282: ...weight of the machine options not included is as follows DP 3510 3520 3530 283 lb 128 5 kg with the i ADF pre installed DP 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 290 lb 131 5 kg with the i ADF pre installed 3 The maximum power consumption is 1 5 kW Depending on the product destination the wall outlet must be rated for 120 VAC or 220 240 VAC accordingly It must also be protected for at least 15 amps for 120...

Page 283: ... 8 in 300 mm 11 in 280 mm 17 3 in 440 mm 29 8 in 758 mm 19 9 in 505 mm 23 6 in 600 mm 101 2 in 2570 mm 95 3 in 2420 mm Copier Finisher 3000 Sheet LCT LT R_LGL Adapter 83 3 in 2115 mm 3 9 in 100 mm 3 9 in 100 mm 3 9 in 100 mm 10 4 in 265 mm 3 9 in 100 mm 11 8 in 300 mm 29 8 in 758 mm 29 5 in 750 mm 23 6 in 600 mm 19 9 in 505 mm Copier Finisher 54 6 in 1387 mm 3 9 in 100 mm 3 9 in 100 mm 3 9 in 100 ...

Page 284: ...kg with the i ADF pre installed To prevent injuries use the appropriate number of personnel and the proper equipment to lift or move the machine Contents List Note 1 The part number may differ depending on the Destination 2 Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual No Qty Description Part No Remarks 1 1 Main Unit 2 1 Operating Instructions See Note 3 1 Panasonic DMS CD See Note Includes Operatin...

Page 285: ... the opened position to avoid the possibility of damaging the Pressure Rollers OPC Drum Do Not turn the Power Switches ON before unlocking the Pressure Roller OPC Drum 7 3 1 Installation Procedure 1 Open the 4 Handle Covers and swing the Handles upward then pullout to lock them in place Note To release the Handles lift the Release Latch upwards and push the Handles toward the machine 2 Lift and pl...

Page 286: ...e Blue Screw removed in step 4 into the 2nd Paper Tray as illustrated 6 Open the Front Cover 7 Swing the Hopper open 180 8 Remove the Protective Tape from the Battery 9 To unlock the Pressure Roller turn the screw with a Straight Edge Screwdriver clockwise until you hear a click ...

Page 287: ... Release Lever Clockwise 90 15 Remove the Developer Unit 16 Release 3 Latch Hooks and remove the Upper Developer Cover 17 Shake the bottle of developer thoroughly approx 30 seconds 18 Pour the appropriate developer evenly into the developer unit Make sure to empty the bottle 19 Reinstall the Upper Developer Cover Note When reinstalling ensure that 3 Latch Hooks are hooked correctly 20 Reinstall th...

Page 288: ...r Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position Note Perform the following adjustments after the machine has warmed up and displays For Other Destinations not USA and Canada follow the steps 28 34 below 28 Install the Exit Tray Assembly to the Upper Exit Cover 29 Open the Upper Exit Cover 30 Remove 1 Scr...

Page 289: ... Switch Off until the adjustment cycle stops Refer to the Sequence Chart below 3 Press the STOP key 4 Press the 6 key to enter the F6 Mode 5 Write the contents of F6 21 26 and 65 on the memory sheet included inside the 2nd Paper Tray 6 Press the STOP key 7 Press the FUNCTION and C CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode 7 3 4 Set the Date and Time 1 Press the FUNCTION key 2 Touch the bu...

Page 290: ...st Chart 53 54 with gray scale P N FQ SJ1011 and verify the density as shown below If it is within specification skip to step 10 a Gray scale A should not be visible b Gray scale 2 should be clearly visible 5 Press the RESET key to exit the F2 Mode 6 Press the 6 key to enter the F6 Mode 7 Enter F6 50 Mode T P Mode Image Density 8 Press the INPUT button 9 Enter the new content 10 Enter a 2 digit va...

Page 291: ...tion There will never be a need for 2 of these even if there are other options such as fax added Before proceeding it is important to determine the Final Configuration of your machine in order to correctly identify the required firmware from the table below Carefully read and follow the Installation Instructions for the appropriate option The firmware for SC SPC and PNL must be updated in this seq...

Page 292: ...he CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file exe is Double clicked Example From Destination Shortcut Batch File D CD ROM Drive xFirmware USA bat Firmware Code File DP 3530_4530_6030_xx_xxxxxx exe To Firmware Data Folder C Panasonic Panasonic FUP Data 3 Preparing the Main Unit fo...

Page 293: ... CD ROM only Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool Operating Instructions xFirmware Tools Firmup FIRMUP OI pdf Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD Setup xFirmware Tools Firmup Setup Setup exe 2 Preparing the Firmware Code Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD R...

Page 294: ...are code the display may become garbled however it will return to normal upon completion of the firmware update 3 Please refer to the service manual for additional details 4 The suffix _xx for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination location Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder Firmware File DP 3530_4530_6030_xx_xxxxxx SC_STD SFD_M25RAxVxxxxx xx SFD_...

Page 295: ...ion There will never be a need for 2 of these even if there are other options such as fax added Before proceeding it is important to determine the Final Configuration of your machine in order to correctly identify the required firmware from the table below Carefully read and follow the Installation Instructions for the appropriate option The firmware for SC SPC and PNL must be updated in this sequ...

Page 296: ...e Firmware Data Folder in your PC Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file exe is Double clicked Example From Destination Shortcut Batch File D CD ROM Drive xFirmware USA bat Firmware Code File DP 3520_4520_6020_xx_xxxxxx exe To Firmware Data Folder C Panasonic Panasonic FUP Data 3 Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware ...

Page 297: ... CD ROM only Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool Operating Instructions xFirmware Tools Firmup FIRMUP OI pdf Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD Setup xFirmware Tools Firmup Setup Setup exe 2 Preparing the Firmware Code Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD R...

Page 298: ... become garbled however it will return to normal upon completion of the firmware update 3 Please refer to the service manual for additional details 4 The suffix _xx for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination location Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder Firmware File Transferring Order DP 3520_4520_6020_xx_xxxxxx SC_STD SFDM_MK2AxVxxxxx xx SFDM_MK2A...

Page 299: ...e will never be a need for 2 of these even if there are other options such as fax added Before proceeding it is important to determine the Final Configuration of your machine in order to correctly identify the required firmware from the table below Carefully read and follow the Installation Instructions for the appropriate option The firmware for SC SPC and PNL must be updated in this sequence as ...

Page 300: ...the Firmware Data Folder in your PC Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file exe is Double clicked Example From Destination Shortcut Batch File D CD ROM Drive xFirmware USA bat Firmware Code File DP 3510_4510_6010_xx_xxxxxx exe To Firmware Data Folder C Panasonic Panasonic FUP Data 3 Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmwar...

Page 301: ... CD ROM only Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool Operating Instructions xFirmware Tools Firmup FIRMUP OI pdf Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD Setup xFirmware Tools Firmup Setup Setup exe 2 Preparing the Firmware Code Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD R...

Page 302: ...y may become garbled however it will return to normal upon completion of the firmware update 3 Please refer to the service manual for additional details 4 The suffix _xx for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination location Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder Firmware File Transferring Order DP 3510_4510_6010_xx_xxxxxx PNL SFDM_PNLAxVxxxxxx xx SFDM_P...

Page 303: ...sen 5 Screws 2 Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated 3 Install the Hardware Key into one of the three available connectors CN67 CN68 or CN69 on the SC PC Board Note The connectors are keyed to prevent damage to the SC PC Board install the Hardware Key as illustrated Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way 4 Proceed with the installation of other options If finished ...

Page 304: ...to the Installation Instruction of the Program Expansion Board DA EM600 2 Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below CAUTION Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation Qty Description Part No Remarks 1 Hardware Key PCL KEY 1 Software CD See Note Includes O...

Page 305: ... on the SC PC Board Note The connectors are keyed to prevent damage to the SC PC Board install the Hardware Key as illustrated Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way 4 Proceed with the installation of other options If finished close and secure the Rear Plate and reinstall remaining Covers 5 Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch...

Page 306: ... Instruction of the Program Expansion Board DA EM600 2 Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below CAUTION Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation Qty Description Part No Remarks 1 Hardware Key PCL KEY 1 Software CD DZRQ000288 or Includes Operating Instr...

Page 307: ...oard Note The connectors are keyed to prevent damage to the SC PC Board install the Hardware Key as illustrated Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way 4 Proceed with the installation of other options If finished close and secure the Rear Plate and reinstall remaining Covers 5 Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back an...

Page 308: ...truction of the Program Expansion Board DA EM600 2 Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below CAUTION Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation Qty Description Part No Remarks 1 Hardware Key PCL KEY 1 Software CD DZRQ000059 or Includes Operating Instructi...

Page 309: ...tor if facing the wrong way 4 Proceed with the installation of other options If finished close and secure the Rear Plate and reinstall remaining Covers 5 Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position 6 Update the firmware of the unit to the PCL Option firmware Refer to the Service Notes...

Page 310: ...rd DA EM600 2 Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below CAUTION Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation Qty Description Part No Remarks 1 Hardware Key PS KEY 1 Software CD See Note Includes Operating Instructions 1 Adobe Postscript 3 Label 1 License Ag...

Page 311: ... are keyed to prevent damage to the SC PC Board install the Hardware Key as illustrated Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way 4 Proceed with the installation of other options If finished close and secure the Rear Plate and reinstall remaining Covers 5 Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on th...

Page 312: ... Hardware Key by following the steps below CAUTION Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation Qty Description Part No Remarks 1 Hardware Key PS KEY 1 Software CD DZRQ000292 or DZRQ000293 Includes Operating Instructions 1 Adobe Postscript 3 Label DZNK004647 1 License ...

Page 313: ...revent damage to the SC PC Board install the Hardware Key as illustrated Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way 4 Proceed with the installation of other options If finished close and secure the Rear Plate and reinstall remaining Covers 5 Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of ...

Page 314: ...ardware Key by following the steps below CAUTION Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation Qty Description Part No Remarks 1 Hardware Key PS KEY 1 Software CD DZRQ000123 or DZRQ000124 Includes Operating Instructions 1 Adobe Postscript 3 Label DZNK004647 1 License Ag...

Page 315: ...ith the installation of other options If finished close and secure the Rear Plate and reinstall remaining Covers 5 Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position 6 Update the firmware of the unit to the PS PCL Option firmware Refer to the Service Notes 7 Install the PS PCL6 Software into...

Page 316: ...ews 2 Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated 3 Install the Hardware Key into one of the three available connectors CN67 CN68 or CN69 on the SC PC Board Note The connectors are keyed to prevent damage to the SC PC Board install the Hardware Key as illustrated Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way 4 Proceed with the installation of other options If finished close and...

Page 317: ...allation Instructions DZSM000782 This document 1 Loosen 5 Screws 2 Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated 3 Install the Hardware Key into one of the three available connectors CN67 CN68 or CN69 on the SC PC Board Note The connectors are keyed to prevent damage to the SC PC Board install the Hardware Key as illustrated Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way 4 Proceed...

Page 318: ... NS600 is already installed remove it first 2 If the Firmware version installed on the machine is SC SFDM_MK2AxV30700 PNL MMK2_PNLAxV30000 SPC SFDM_SPCAxV30100 or older it must be updated for this option by referring to the Service Notes Please use the DP 3520 4520 6020 firmware provided separately by the local Sales Company or Download it from the technical support Web site ...

Page 319: ... 13 2 Installation CAUTION Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation Qty Description Part No Remarks 1 Hardware Key IFX KEY 1 Operating Instructions For Facsimile and Internet Fax See Note 1 Installation Instructions DZSM000755 This document 1 Loosen 5 Screws 2 Remo...

Page 320: ...eft Side of the machine to the ON position 6 Update the firmware of the unit Refer to the Service Notes 7 Execute Parameter Initialize by following the steps below a Press the FUNCTION ORIGINAL SIZE LEDGER A3 and 3 keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode b Press the 9 and START keys to enter the F9 Mode c Press 00 FAX Service Mode d Press 06 RAM Initialize e Press 01 Parameter ...

Page 321: ...ce c Press 00 FAX Service Mode d Press 06 RAM Initialize e Press 03 Auto Dial Clear and the Yes button for Initialize Then press Yes button for Address Book 1 000 stations Wait approximately 2 minutes while unit displays In Progress then the unit will return to stand by Using Network Address Book Editor to Transfer the Address Book Data The registered data in the 200 Station Address Book can be ea...

Page 322: ...ess Book f When the 200 station Fax Address Book file is displayed save the data file by clicking on File Save As and type the file name of your choice i e 200 Station g Then click the OK button 2 Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1 000 stations using the Service Mode described above 3 Retrieve the 1 000 Fax Address Book empty data again from the unit using the same method as above W...

Page 323: ... on the Back of the machine to the OFF position and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation Qty Description Part No Remarks 1 FXB PC Board See Note 1 MJR PC Board Assembly See Note 1 MJR Harness See Note 1 Speaker Assembly See Note 1 Speaker Harness 2 Extension See Note 1 SDRM Bracket See Note 1 Stamp Assembly See Note 1 Stamp Solenoid See Note 1 Telephone Line Cable See Note 1...

Page 324: ...ective tab on the Left Rear Cover for the LINE connection If installing an External Telephone remove the Lower protective tab as well 10 Attach the Line Label to the Left Rear Cover as illustrated 11 Remove 2 Protective Films 12 Route the Speaker Harness through the speaker hole in the frame and install the Speaker Assembly 13 Secure with 2 Screws Short 14 Connect the Speaker Harness 2 Extension t...

Page 325: ...chine by inserting the Hooks into the slots on the frame 17 Secure the MJR PC Board Assembly with 5 Screws Short 18 Remove 1 Screw from the SC PC Board 19 Install the SDRAM Bracket into the machine and secure it with 1 Screw removed in Step 18 20 Route the Harnesses and pass through the frame in the rear of the unit as illustrated 21 Secure the Harnesses to the 2 Harness Clamps 22 Secure the Harne...

Page 326: ...e the G3 Fax PC Board with 3 Screws Short 26 Connect the Harness to 3 Connectors on the FXB PC Board CN391 CN392 and CN393 27 Proceed with the installation of other options If finished close and secure the Rear Plate and reinstall remaining Covers 28 Open the ADF Cover 29 Lift the Lower Opening and Shutting guide 2 Assembly 30 Lift the Original Tray Assembly 31 Lower the Inverting Guide 4 Assembly...

Page 327: ...Harness to Stamp Solenoid 37 Secure the Stamp Solenoid with 1 Screw Long 38 Reinstall the Lower Exit Guide removed in Step 35 39 Install the Stamp Assembly 40 Reinstall the all parts removed in above steps and close the ADF Covers 41 Attach the TA Label specified destination to the Lower Rear Cover as illustrated 34 35 36 37 39 38 TA Label ...

Page 328: ... The Fax Firmware is automatically loaded with the Host Firmware PB UK PF France PG Switzerland PK China PM Germany PT Taiwan PU USA PEU UK Note For other destinations set the Function Parameter 005 Destination Code 000 Austria 001 U K 002 Canada 003 Denmark 004 Taiwan 005 Finland 006 Germany 007 Netherlands 008 Italy 009 Spanish 010 Hong Kong 011 Australia 012 Switzerland 013 Norway 015 Portugues...

Page 329: ...enable the parameter settings 46 Verify the position of the stamp on the document If it is not within the desired location at the bottom of the document you can adjust its position by following the steps below a Press the FUNCTION ORIGINAL SIZE LEDGER A3 and 3 keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode b Press the 6 and START keys to enter the F6 Mode Adjust Parameters c Press 69 ...

Page 330: ...ce c Press 00 FAX Service Mode d Press 06 RAM Initialize e Press 03 Auto Dial Clear and the Yes button for Initialize Then press Yes button for Address Book 1 000 stations Wait approximately 2 minutes while unit displays In Progress then the unit will return to stand by Using Network Address Book Editor to Transfer the Address Book Data The registered data in the 200 Station Address Book can be ea...

Page 331: ...ess Book f When the 200 station Fax Address Book file is displayed save the data file by clicking on File Save As and type the file name of your choice i e 200 Station g Then click the OK button 2 Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1 000 stations using the Service Mode described above 3 Retrieve the 1 000 Fax Address Book empty data again from the unit using the same method as above W...

Page 332: ...n and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation Qty Description Part No Remarks 1 Hard Disk Drive HDD See Note 1 DC PCB Assembly DZHP007347 1 HDD Bracket DZJE001046 1 HDD2 Harness DZFP001109 Power Supply Cable 1 HD Harness DZFP001293 Flat Cable 1 DC12 Harness DZFP001184 3 Connectors 1 Clamp DZJK000077 4 Silver Screw Short See Note 5 Screw Long See Note 1 Installation Instructions...

Page 333: ...0 6030 5 Remove 4 Screws 6 Remove the Frame 7 Open the Right Cover 8 Remove 3 Silver Screws 9 Remove the Right Rear Cover 10 Remove the Toner Waste Container Note Connect the HD Harness to the HDD as illustrated 5 6 7 8 9 10 HDD To SC PCB UL Tape Black Shield Key ...

Page 334: ...on the SC PC Board as illustrated 17 Remove the Screw from the frame and secure the HD Harness Clamp with this Screw as illustrated Note Ensure that the clamp is around the shielded portion of the Harness and not around the UL Tape Black 18 Install the DC PCB Assembly Note If the Fax Communication Board DA FG600 is installed disconnect the CN392 Harness on the FX PCB Route the Harness over the DC ...

Page 335: ...e machine writes the closing status onto the Hard Disk Drive Unit 3 Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position This interrupts all the power to the machine 4 Unplug the AC Power Cord 21 Connect the DC12 Harness to CN141 and CN142 on the DC PC Board 22 Secure the DC12 Harness with 4 Clamps 23 Connect the DC12 Harness to the LVPS 24 Reinstall the Toner Waste Container ...

Page 336: ...e F9 Mode Unit Maintenance c Press 00 FAX Service Mode d Press 06 RAM Initialize e Press 03 Auto Dial Clear and the Yes button for Initialize Then press Yes button for Address Book 1 000 stations Wait approximately 2 minutes while unit displays In Progress then the unit will return to stand by Using Network Address Book Editor to Transfer the Address Book Data The registered data in the 200 Statio...

Page 337: ...ess Book f When the 200 station Fax Address Book file is displayed save the data file by clicking on File Save As and type the file name of your choice i e 200 Station g Then click the OK button 2 Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1 000 stations using the Service Mode described above 3 Retrieve the 1 000 Fax Address Book empty data again from the unit using the same method as above W...

Page 338: ...ially to enter the F5 42 KEY DEPT Counter 5 Select the DEPT and then OK buttons to activate the Key Dept Counter function 6 Press the STOP key Note The factory default setting for the Key Operator ID Code is 0000 to ensure security it is recommended to change this code Follow the steps below to change the Key Operator ID Code While in the Service Mode press 7 to enter the F7 Service Mode Press the...

Page 339: ... Manual 8 17 2 Installation Install the DD Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard Qty Description Part No Remarks 1 DD Server Software CD See Note Includes Operating Instructions 1 License Agreement DZSH000112 For USA and Canada only 1 DZSH000113 For Other Destinations 1 DD Server Operating Instructions DZSD001791 1 Installation Ins...

Page 340: ...port NH 7 1 Installation Instructions DZSM000756 This document 1 Loosen 5 Screws 2 Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated 3 Install 2 PC Board Supporters for the Slot 1 on the SC PC Board 4 Install the Program Expansion Board into Slot 1 CN62 on the SC PC Board and secure with the Supporters Note The Program Extension F ROM Board must always be installed into Slot 1 CN62 for the PCL or PCL PS Printe...

Page 341: ...on Part No Remarks 1 Image Memory DZEC102306 16 MB DZEC101919 64 MB DZEC102307 128 MB 1 Installation Instructions DZSM000757 This document 1 Loosen 5 Screws 2 Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated 3 Insert the SDRM PC Board into the Socket on the SC PC Board as illustrated Note Make sure to insert the SDRM PC Board at a 20 30 angle into the memory socket and then lock it down 4 Proceed with the ins...

Page 342: ...ft Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation Qty Description Part No Remarks 1 Image Memory UE 410047 4 MB UE 410048 8 MB 1 Remove 1 Silver Screw 2 Remove the Flash Memory Cover 3 Insert the Expansion Flash Memory Card as illustrated 4 Reinstall the Right Rear Cover 5 Plug the AC Power Cord into the...

Page 343: ...art No Remarks 1 System Console See Note 1 Screw M3 x 6 See Note Included inside the Paper Tray 1 Installation Instructions PJQRC0045Z This document 1 Open the 4 Handle Covers and swing the Handles upward then pullout to lock them in place Note To release the handles lift the release latch upwards and push the handles toward the machine 2 Lift and place the machine on the System Console DA DS603 D...

Page 344: ...t the speed by following the steps below 1 Remove 2 Silver Screws 2 Remove the Lower Rear Cover 3 Remove 2 Snap Rings 4 Remove the Belt 2 Gears and 2 Plastic Washers 5 Turn both Gears over and reinstall 2 Gears 2 Plastic Washers and the Belt Note When reinstalling the gears mount the Plastic Washers onto the gears first before inserting them into the shaft 6 Make sure the Gear Combination to Match...

Page 345: ...STOP key 7 Press the FUNCTION and C CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode 8 Make a copy to verify your adjustment repeat the steps above if further adjustment is required Note The Gear Combination Shown on the Left is for DP 3530 4530 as default setting Note After the machine is installed be sure to lock the 2 Casters in front If necessary adjust the Leveler behind the right front cas...

Page 346: ... No Remarks 1 System Console See Note 1 Screw M3 x 6 XTB3 6F Included inside the Paper Tray 1 Installation Instructions DZSM000509 This document 1 Open the 4 Handle Covers and swing the Handles upward then pullout to lock them in place Note To release the handles lift the release latch upwards and push the handles toward the machine 2 Lift and place the machine on the System Console DA DS601 DS602...

Page 347: ...adjust the speed by following the steps below 1 Remove 2 Silver Screws 2 Remove the Lower Rear Cover 3 Remove 2 Snap Rings 4 Remove the Belt 2 Gears and 2 Plastic Washers 5 Turn both Gears over and reinstall 2 Gears 2 Plastic Washers and the Belt Note When reinstalling the gears mount the Plastic Washers onto the gears first before inserting them into the shaft 6 Make sure the Gear Combination to ...

Page 348: ... Press the FUNCTION and C CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode 8 Make a copy to verify your adjustment repeat the steps above if further adjustment is required Note The Gear Combination Shown on the Left is for DP 3510 3520 4510 4520 as default setting Note After the machine is installed be sure to lock the 2 Casters in front If necessary adjust the Leveler behind the right front cas...

Page 349: ... the Back of the machine to the OFF position and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation Qty Description Part No Remarks 1 3000 Sheet Tray LCT See Note 1 Paper Guide DZJF000543 1 Rail Assy DZJA001049 1 Harnes Clamp PLWS4 2 Screw M4 x 10 See Note 2 Silver Screw M4 x 10 See Note 2 Screw M4 x 8 See Note 1 Installation Instructions DZSM000488 This document 1 Remove the Protective C...

Page 350: ...all the Rail Assembly 6 Secure the Rail Assembly with 2 Screws M4 x 10 7 Install the LCT on the Rail Assembly Note Make sure 2 Latches fit into 2 Guide Pins of the Rail Assembly in Front and Rear 8 Secure the LCT with 2 Screws M4 x 8 in Front and Rear 9 Adjust the LCT level with 2 Adjusters Note Make sure the gaps A and B are the same 3 4 5 6 8 A B 9 9 9 ...

Page 351: ...ment repeat the steps above if further adjustment is required 10 Connect the LCT Cable to the machine 11 Connect the System Console Cable to the LCT 12 Install the Harness Clamp PLWS4 on the Rear Cover 13 Secure the System Console Cable with the Harness Clamp 14 Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machi...

Page 352: ...Power Cord before beginning installation Note Make sure that the Paper Table is at the bottom Position Qty Description Part No Remarks 2 Paper Guide DZJA001020 1 Rear Guide Plate B DZJA001116 1 Front Guide Plate B DZJA001117 1 Upper Support Plate DZJA001118 1 Lower Support Plate DZJA001119 1 Paper Table DZJA001120 1 Door Large DZJE000988 1 Paper Size Label Legal DZNK004085 1 Paper Size Label Lette...

Page 353: ... the Door Lock Lever onto the Door Large 9 Remove 2 Screws 10 Remove Front and Rear Guide Plate A 11 Install the Lower Support Plate 12 Secure with 4 Screws 13 Install the Guide Plate A onto the Paper Guides on both side as illustrated 14 Secure the Guide Plate A with 2 Screws 7 Latch Door Lock Lever 9 10 11 12 14 13 Paper Guide ...

Page 354: ...ote Insert the Paper Guide into the lower desired paper size slot of the Base Unit first then hook to the upper slot in the Mechanical Assembly 17 Install the Legal Tray 18 Secure the Paper Table with 3 Screws as illustrated 19 Install the Front and Rear Guide Plate B 20 Secure the Guide Plates B with 2 Screws 16 15 16 15 Legal B4 Letter A4 Legal B4 Letter A4 1 2 17 3 19 20 20 19 ...

Page 355: ...illustrated 22 Secure the Plates with 4 Screws 23 Install the Door Large onto the Mounting Pins 24 Secure with 1 Screw 25 Place a sheet of paper and close the Door Large 26 Turn the Power Switches On 27 After the Tray comes up turn the Power Switches Off 28 Remove 1 Screw 29 Remove the Sensor Assy from the Letter Position 22 22 21 22 24 23 28 29 ...

Page 356: ...34 Reinstall the Sensor Assy at the Legal position 35 Secure with 1 Screw 36 Reinstall the Top Cover 37 Reinstall the Front Cover 38 Attach the Paper Size Label as illustrated Note See Installation Instructions of the LCT for adjusting LCT label 39 Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON p...

Page 357: ...sembly DZHP006490 1 Exit Roller E Assembly DZHP007040 For USA and Canada only 1 Exit Roller Gear 1 Black DZLF000639 For USA and Canada only DP 35xx 1 Stop Plate DZJL000333 1 Stop Plate 2 DZJL000334 2 Screw See Note 1 E Ring See Note For USA and Canada only DP 35xx 1 Installation Instructions DZSM000558 This document Note For USA and Canada follow the steps below For Other Destinations skip to the ...

Page 358: ...tep 11 9 Remove the E Ring and Exit Roller Gear 1 White 10 Install the Exit Roller Gear 1 Black and E Ring included with this kit 11 Install the Exit Roller E Assembly included with this kit and secure it with 2 Screws 12 Reinstall the Exit Guide 1 Assembly and Exit Guide 3 Assembly 13 Close the Upper Exit Cover 14 Install the Exit Tray Assembly to the Upper Exit Cover 7 8 7 9 10 11 11 14 ...

Page 359: ...secure it with 1 Screw as illustrated 18 Install the Stop Plate 2 and secure it with 1 Screw as illustrated 19 Secure the Upper Exit Cover Stopper with 1 Screw removed in step 16 above 20 Close the Upper Exit Cover 21 Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position 17 16 18 ...

Page 360: ...sher See Note 2 Tray 4G1 0772 000 1 Inlet Guide 4F1 2122 000 1 Latch Plate 4G1 5204 000 1 Harness Cover Longer 4A1 8442 000 1 Harness Cover Shorter 4A1 3703 000 1 Base Plate 4B1 0933 000 1 Face Plate Button 4A1 8441 000 1 Guide Rail 4G1 5202 000 1 Connecting Plate 4B1 0934 000 1 Exit Roller U Assembly DZHP007141 Except for USA and Canada 7 Screw M4 x 8 See Note 4 Black Screw M4 x 6 See Note 2 Scre...

Page 361: ...e 2 Removing the Packaging Materials Note The Machine is protected during shipment with Tapes and Spacers against vibration and shock When the site has been selected move the Machine to the appropriate site and remove all Packaging Materials as illustrated below Although the Finisher is equipped with Casters it moves only in a straight line 1 Take the Accessory Box out of the Package Caution Do no...

Page 362: ...ers and remove all tapes and packing materials 6 Close the Covers Caution The removed Tapes and Packaging Material will be required when transporting the Machine for relocation or repairs it is a good idea to store them for future use 3 Preparing for the Installation of the Finisher Assembly Caution Before connecting the Finisher to its Host Machine mount the Trays and other parts to the Finisher ...

Page 363: ... included with the finisher 4 Mount the upper Tray in the same way 5 Connect the Sensor Cable to the Sensor Connector found in the left bottom corner of each Tray 6 Mount the Harness Covers to each Tray Unit Starting with the bottom Harness Cover Shorter Note Insert the bottom Hook into the top hole and snap it into place 3 Sensor Cable Harness Cover ...

Page 364: ...Manual 3 Install the Finisher IPC PC Board onto SPC PC Board Connector CN727 4 Reinstall the SPC Cover and Toner Waste Container Note Gently and securely insert the IPC PC Board as illustrated Note The following steps 5 15 are not applicable for USA and Canada 5 Open the Front Door 6 Open the Upper Exit Cover 7 Remove 3 Screws 8 Remove the Exit Guide 3 Assembly 9 Remove 2 Screws 10 Remove the Exit...

Page 365: ...xit Cover 16 Insert the bottom 2 Silver Screws M4 x 12 first and tighten them 1 2 way 17 Place the Latch Plate on top of these Silver Screws M4 x 12 18 Install the upper 2 Silver Screws M4 x 12 and then tighten all the 4 screws Note If the Punch Unit DA SP31 is also being installed before continuing to the next step install the Punch Unit DA SP31 first 19 Install the Inlet Guide 20 Secure it with ...

Page 366: ... 21 Install the Guide Rail to the back of the machine as illustrated 22 Secure it with 3 Screws M4 x 8 23 Remove 2 Black Shipping Screws 24 Break off the bottom 2 Protective Tabs 25 Install the Base Plate 26 Secure the Base Plate with 2 Screws M4 x 25 22 21 22 23 25 26 ...

Page 367: ...ear adjust the height position of the Finisher Caution Be sure to install both Finisher and the Host Machine on a flat floor surface A difference in height can lead to faulty movement of paper 2 As illustrated install the Face Plate Button in the round hole of the Right Guide Assembly of the Finisher However do NOT install it if you are also installing the Punch Unit 3 Install the Connecting Plate...

Page 368: ...height before adjusting the slope 2 If there is a difference in Height between the upper surface of the Right Guide Assembly of the Finisher and the Alignment Lines on the Left Platen Cover of the Host Machine Align the upper surface of the Right Guide Assembly of the Finisher to the Alignment Lines on the Left Platen Cover of the Host Machine 3 Adjust the Finisher level with 4 Adjusters Note Make...

Page 369: ...e Screws and then detach each Foot Cover 9 To correct the height loosen the Fixing Screws Black on the Front and Rear Casters on the pickup side of the Finisher 10 To increase the height of the Finisher turn the Adjusting Bolt clockwise as illustrated turn the Adjusting Bolt as required Perform this for both Front and Rear Casters 7 7 8 8 8 8 Adjusting Bolt Fixing Screws Black ...

Page 370: ...usting Bolt counter clockwise turn the Adjusting Bolt as required Perform this for both Front and Rear Casters 15 Connect the Finisher to the Host Machine and check to see that the difference in height and the slope are within the indicated tolerances otherwise make the adjustments once again 16 When done disconnect the Finisher from the Host Machine and tighten the fixing Screws Black on the Cast...

Page 371: ...in Saddle Stitch Finisher See Note 2 Tray 4G1 0772 000 1 Inlet Guide 4F1 2122 000 1 Latch Plate 4G1 5204 000 1 Harness Cover Longer 4A1 8442 000 1 Harness Cover Shorter 4A1 3703 000 1 Base Plate 4B1 0933 000 1 Face Plate Button 4A1 8441 000 1 Guide Rail 4G1 5202 000 1 Connecting Plate 4B1 0934 000 1 Exit Roller U Assembly DZHP007141 Except for USA and Canada 7 Screw M4 x 8 See Note 4 Black Screw M...

Page 372: ...pe 2 Removing the Packaging Material Note The Machine is protected during shipment with Tapes and Spacers against vibration and shock When the site has been selected move the Machine to the appropriate site and remove all Packaging Materials as illustrated below Although the Finisher is equipped with Casters it moves only in a straight line 1 Take the Accessory Box out of the Package Caution Do no...

Page 373: ...isher or getting hurt Moreover be sure to pay attention when shifting the Finisher to avoid deforming the Rail Base 5 Open the Covers and remove all tapes and packing materials 6 Close the Covers Caution The removed Tapes and Packaging Material will be required when transporting the Machine for relocation or repairs it is a good idea to store them for future use 3 Removing the Folding Roller Relea...

Page 374: ... Reinstall the Right Lower Cover 4 Removing the Stitcher Fixing Member 1 Open the Front Lower Cover 2 Pullout the Stitcher Assembly 3 Remove 1 Screw and remove the Fixing Member from the Right Side Caution It is good idea to store the removed screws and Fixing Member for future use 4 Slide the Stitcher Assembly back in 5 Close the Front Lower Cover Screw Releasing Plate Rear Front Lower Cover Sadd...

Page 375: ...all 2 Trays to the Finisher Starting with the bottom Tray and then install the upper Tray next 2 As shown fit the bosses on the Tray into the holes in the Horizontal Frames and lower it Be sure that the bosses on both sides of the Tray slide into the holes in the Vertical Tray leaving no gap 3 Secure the bottom of the Tray both sides using the 2 Black Screws M4x6 that were included with the finish...

Page 376: ...r Note Insert the bottom Hook into the top hole and snap it into place 6 Preparing the Host Machine for Installation 1 Loosen the 2 Screws and remove the SPC Cover 2 Remove the Toner Waste Container Refer to Section 2 2 2 the Service Manual 3 Install the Finisher IPC PC Board onto SPC PC Board Connector CN727 4 Reinstall the SPC Cover and Toner Waste Container Note Gently and securely insert the I...

Page 377: ...Open the Upper Exit Cover 7 Remove 3 Screws 8 Remove the Exit Guide 3 Assembly 9 Remove 2 Screws 10 Remove the Exit Guide 1 Assembly 11 Remove 2 Screws 12 Remove the Exit Roller E Assembly 13 Secure the Exit Roller U Assembly with 2 Screws 14 Reinstall the Exit Guide 1 Assembly and Exit Guide 3 Assembly 15 Close the Upper Exit Cover 6 8 7 9 10 9 11 12 11 13 13 ...

Page 378: ...er 2 Silver Screws M4 x 12 and then tighten all the 4 screws Note If the Punch Unit DA SP31 is also being installed before continuing to the next step install the Punch Unit DA SP31 first 19 Install the Inlet Guide 20 Secure it with 2 Silver Screws M3 x 10 21 Install the Guide Rail to the back of the machine as illustrated 22 Secure it with 3 Screws M4 x 8 23 Remove 2 Black Shipping Screws 16 18 1...

Page 379: ...connect the two with care If the connection is correct the Guide Pin of the Latch Plate will fit and there will be no gap between the two If there is a gap either at the front or the rear adjust the height position of the Finisher Caution Be sure to install both Finisher and the Host Machine on a flat floor surface A difference in height can lead to faulty movement of paper 2 As illustrated instal...

Page 380: ... 6030 3 Install the Connecting Plate 4 Install these 2 Screws M4 x 8 first 5 Install these remaining 2 Screws M4 x 8 Note Make sure that the Guide Rail is kept horizontally on the Floor 6 Connect the Finisher and its Host Machine with the Interface Cable 3 4 5 5 6 ...

Page 381: ...height before adjusting the slope 2 If there is a difference in Height between the upper surface of the Right Guide Assembly of the Finisher and the Alignment Lines on the Left Platen Cover of the Host Machine Align the upper surface of the Right Guide Assembly of the Finisher to the Alignment Lines on the Left Platen Cover of the Host Machine 3 Adjust the Finisher level with 4 Adjusters Note Make...

Page 382: ...move the Lower Rear Cover 8 Open the Lower Front Cover 9 To correct the height loosen the Fixing Screws Black on the Front and Rear Casters on the pickup side of the Finisher 10 To increase the height of the Finisher turn the Adjusting Bolt clockwise as illustrated turn the Adjusting Bolt as required Perform this for both Front and Rear Casters 6 6 6 7 7 8 Adjusting Bolt Fixing Screws Black ...

Page 383: ...he indicated tolerances otherwise make the adjustments once again 16 When done disconnect the Finisher from the Host Machine and tighten the fixing Screws Black on the Casters 17 To prevent loosening of the adjusting bolts during relocation of the machine turn the adjusting bolts about 90º in the direction of the arrow be sure not to over tighten them as such can lead to displacement 18 Plug the A...

Page 384: ...the AC Power Cord before beginning installation Qty Description Part No Remarks 1 Punch Unit See Note 1 Punch Lower Cover 4A1 8409 000 1 Punch Relay Harness FF3 4067 000 1 Upper Cover Guide 4A1 8408 000 1 Guide Plate Long 4B1 0949 000 1 Jam Removal Instructions Label FB5 5924 000 2 Shoulder Screw Silver See Note 2 Stepped Mounting Screw Silver See Note 1 Black Screw M4 x 6 See Note 2 Silver Screw ...

Page 385: ...th front and rear Note It is a good idea to store the removed Punch Fixing Plate and shipping Screws for future use Connecting to the Finisher 1 Make sure that the copier is unplugged and Finisher is disconnected 2 Install the Stepped Mounting Screws as illustrated 3 Remove the 4 Screws as illustrated and detach the Connector Cover 1 and Connector Cover 2 2 Guide Plate Long Punch Fixing Plate 1 St...

Page 386: ... try disconnecting and then re connecting the Connector 5 Hook the Punch Unit on the Mounting Screw which was installed in step 2 6 Secure the Punch Unit to the Finisher in place using Shoulder Screws as illustrated 7 Secure the Punch Lower Cover to the Finisher as illustrated with 1 Silver Screw M4 x 12 at the top and 1 Black Screw M4 x 6 at the bottom Punch Relay Harness Punch Driver PCB J3 J4 S...

Page 387: ...te The Connector Cover 2 removed from the Rear Cover of the Finisher will no longer be needed when the Punch Unit is installed nevertheless it may be a good idea to store it for future use 1 Secure the Connector Cover 1 with 2 Screws 2 Open the Punch Unit 10 Jam Removal Instructions Label has already been installed on the Punch Unit If other language is required please attach the required language...

Page 388: ...ray GP01 3415 Assembled 1 Guide Bar GH03 3103 1 Lower Tray GP01 3403 1 Stand DZJA001230 1 Front Cover DZJE001064 1 Rear Cover DZJE001065 1 Front Magnet Catch Plate DZJA001226 1 Rear Magnet Catch Plate DZJA001227 1 Switch Bracket DZJA001225 1 Locking Clamp GS01 6503 1 Exit Roller U Assembly DZHP007718 Except for USA and Canada 2 Screw M4 x 8 See Note 2 Screw M4 x 10 See Note 2 Screw M4 x 30 See Not...

Page 389: ...using the following procedure 1 Take the Stapler Finisher and accessories out of the package 2 Remove the tapes securing the Stapler Finisher Accessory Cover etc along with the packing materials Note The removed tapes and packing materials will be needed when transporting the finisher for relocation or repair it is a good idea to store them away for future use 3 Preparing the Host Machine for Inst...

Page 390: ... Screws 13 Reinstall the Exit Guide 1 Assembly and Exit Guide 3 Assembly 14 Close the Upper Exit Cover 15 Place the Front Magnet Catch Plate 16 Insert the lower 1 Screw M3 x 10 and tighten it 1 2 way 17 Install the upper 1 Screw M3 x 10 and then tighten both screws 18 Place the Rear Magnet Catch Plate 19 Insert the lower 1 Screw M3 x 10 and tighten it 1 2 way 20 Install the upper 1 Screw M3 x 10 a...

Page 391: ...s illustrated 23 Remove the 2 Protective Tabs using a Nipper 4 Attaching to the Host Machine Caution Be sure install both the Finisher and Host Machine on a level floor A stepped or slanted floor can result in improper paper feed 1 Fit the hooks of the Stand into the mounting holes on the side panel of the Host Machine 2 Secure the Stand with 2 Screws M4 x 30 3 Slide the Rails of the Stand to the ...

Page 392: ... and Rear Covers as illustrated 7 Secure the Covers with 2 Screws M4 x 10 8 Install the Upper and Lower Trays 9 Install the Locking Clamp 10 Place the Interface Cable into the Locking Clamp and connect it to the Host Machine 11 Slide the Finisher towards the Host Machine Note Ensure that the Magnet Catch Plates are aligned with the Magnets of the Finisher Finisher 6 7 7 6 Lower Tray Upper Tray Fin...

Page 393: ...tch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position 6 Punch Hole Position Adjustment Before proceeding with this adjustment make sure that the Copier s side to side registration is adjusted properly 1 Loosen the 2 Screws of the Finisher 2 Adjust it to the front or rear accordingly Note Verify that the punch holes are center aligned by folding a test copy in half If the holes are not center alig...

Page 394: ...Finisher See Note 1 Stapler PF4117K226A 1 Delivery Tray PF4117K225A 1 Stand PF4117K604A 1 Exit Roller U Assembly DZHP007718 Except for USA and Canada 1 Exit Roller Gear 1 White FFPMF1069 Except for USA and Canada Used for DP 45xx 1 E Ring See Note 1 Latch Plate PF4117K101A 6 Screw M4 x 7 See Note 4 Silver Screw M3 x 10 See Note 2 Silver Screw M4 x 30 See Note 1 IPC PC Board PF4117P003 2 Spacer PF4...

Page 395: ...he following procedure 1 Take the Stapler Finisher and accessories out of the package 2 Remove the tapes securing the Stapler Finisher Accessory Cover etc along with the packing materials Note The removed tapes and packing materials will be needed when transporting the finisher for relocation or repair it is a good idea to store them away for future use 3 Preparing the Host Machine for Finisher In...

Page 396: ...ow the Steps below 5 Open the Front Cover 6 Swing the Hopper Unit to the right side 7 Open the Upper Exit Cover 8 Push the Release Lever down in order to free the Exit Guide 7 9 Remove 2 Screws 10 Remove the Fuser Cover 11 Disconnect the 4 Harnesses 12 Remove 1 Screw 13 Remove the Fuser Unit 5 6 7 8 9 9 10 11 12 11 13 ...

Page 397: ...ep 17 20 Reinstall the Fuser Unit and all remaining parts Note For USA and Canada skip to step 36 21 Open the Front Cover 22 Open the Upper Exit Cover 23 Remove 3 Screws 24 Remove the Exit Guide 3 Assembly If the Exit Guide 3 Assembly has the Rollers 27 follow steps 25 27 to remove If not skip to step 28 25 Remove 2 Stopper Plates 26 Remove 2 Shafts 27 Remove 2 Rollers Fuser Unit Front View 15 14 ...

Page 398: ...h the Exit Roller U Assembly Note For DP 35xx skip to step 34 For DP 45xx follow the Steps below 32 Remove the E Ring and Exit Roller Gear 1 Black 33 Install the Exit Roller Gear 1 White and E Ring included with this kit 34 Secure the Exit Roller U Assembly with 2 Screws 35 Reinstall the Exit Guide 1 Assembly and Exit Guide 3 Assembly 36 Close the Upper Exit Cover 28 29 28 30 31 30 30 29 34 34 ...

Page 399: ...o the Host Machine 40 Remove the 2 Protective Tabs using a Phillips type Screw Driver as illustrated 41 Remove the 2 Protective Tabs using a Nipper 4 Attaching to the Host Machine Caution Be sure install both the Finisher and Host Machine on a level floor A stepped or slanted floor can result in improper paper feed 1 Fit the hooks of the Stand into the mounting holes on the side panel of the Host ...

Page 400: ...r tabs of the Finisher into the holes on top of the Slider Ensure that there is no gap between the Finisher and the Stand The gap would indicate the Finisher is overlapping Remove and mount the Finisher correctly 4 Align the positioning lines of the Finisher and the Stand by moving the Finisher back and forth and tighten 2 Screws when they are aligned Finisher Slider Screws No Gap Finisher Stand F...

Page 401: ... Tray with Screws M4 x 6 as illustrated 8 Open the Front Cover of the Finisher then insert the Stapler along the Guide Rails 9 Close the Front Cover of the Finisher 10 Connect the Finisher to the Host Machine with the Interface Cable Caution Before connecting the Interface Cable make sure to turn OFF the Host Machine and unplug the AC Power Cord from the wall outlet to avoid shock hazards Finisher...

Page 402: ...adjust the height or the perpendicular position of the Finisher to the machine Gaps A and B should be identical 12 Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position Adjuster Adjuster A B ...

Page 403: ...ust Label YA1020P208A 1 Screw M4 x 6 See Note 1 Installation Instructions DZSM000572 This document 1 Removing the Packing Material Note This machine is protected with packing material such as tape and spacers against vibration and shocks caused during transportation Be sure to remove them before using the machine 1 Take the Punch Unit and accessories out of the package 2 Remove the tape securing t...

Page 404: ...r 6 Remove the 3 Screws open the Jam Access Door and detach the Front Cover 7 Close the Jam Access Door 8 Remove the 2 Screws on the paper supply side of the Finisher 9 Remove one screw on the paper ejection side of the Finisher to detach the Rear Cover Screws Screw Latch Release Lever Front Cover Jam Access Cover Rear Cover Screws Screw Rear Cover ...

Page 405: ...inisher 11 Remove the 2 Screws on the back of the Finisher to detach the Upper Right Cover Assembly 3 Attaching to the Finisher 1 Open the lugs of the removed Upper Right Cover Assembly outward to remove the Upper Right Cover Upper Right Cover Assembly Screws Screws Upper Right Cover Assembly Upper Right Cover Lug ...

Page 406: ... Unit on the paper supply section of the Finisher as shown below 3 Secure the Punch Unit to the Finisher with the 2 Original Screws White M4 X 6 and 1 Enclosed Screw Screw with Threaded Washer Held M4 x 6 Latch Positioning Pin Punch Base Cover Screw Screw Screw with Threaded Star Washer ...

Page 407: ...the Upper Right Cover to the Punch Unit 5 Close the Upper Cover 6 Secure the Upper Right Cover to the Finisher with the Original 2 Screws White M4 x 6 7 Paste the jam removal instruction label written in your language in the Label Frame on the Upper Right Cover Upper Right Cover Upper Cover Punch Unit Screws Upper Right Cover Upper Right Cover Jam Access Label Punch Dust Label ...

Page 408: ...o J1003 on same circuit board 9 Connect the other end of the Punch Relay Harness Orange to CN14 on the Finisher Controller Circuit Board and connect the other end of the Punch Relay Harness Violet to CN12 on the same Circuit Board Punch Controller Circuit Board J1004 J1003 Punch Relay Harness Violet Punch Relay Harness Orange Punch Relay Harness Orange Punch Relay Harness Violet CN14 CN12 Finisher...

Page 409: ...taching the Front Cover attach it as the Side Guide is set inside the Front Cover See the figure left If the Front Cover is attached with the Side Guide being set outside up and down operation of Ejection Tray may malfunction 12 Loosen the 2 Screws securing the Finisher and Finisher Frame Punch Relay Harness Orange Harness Guide Harness Clamp Punch Relay Harness Violet Finisher Controller Circuit ...

Page 410: ...tch Plate aligns with the protrusion of the Punch Base Cover 14 Attach the Finisher to the Host Machine and connect the Interface Cable of the Finisher to the Host Machine 15 Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position Host Machine Latch Plate Punch Base Cover Align Finisher ...

Page 411: ... Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation Qty Description Part No Remarks 1 Power Supply for Finisher See Note 1 LVSC Harness DZFP001286 1 Screw XTB3 6F 1 Installation Instructions DZSM000561 This document 1 Open the Front Cover 2 Swing the Hopper Unit to the right side 3 Pull ou...

Page 412: ...to CN65 and CN66 on the Power Supply for Finisher 10 Disconnect the Dummy Connector 11 Connect the LVSC Harness and the LVPS Harness 12 Secure the Power Supply for Finisher with 1 Screw 13 Secure the Harness to the Harness Clamp 14 Reinstall the LVPS Cover 15 Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine ...

Page 413: ...he OFF position and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation Qty Description Part No Remarks 1 Harness KCTU DZFP001387 1 Cover Connector DZMC000783 2 Screw M4 x 10 See Note 1 Installation Instructions DZSM000609 This document 1 Remove 9 Silver Screws 2 Remove the Upper Rear Cover 3 Open the Right Cover 4 Remove 3 Silver Screws 5 Remove the Right Rear Cover 6 Route the KCTU Harne...

Page 414: ...to CN765 on the DRV PC Board 10 Remove the Protective Tab on the Right Rear Cover 11 Reinstall the Right Rear Cover and Upper Rear Cover 12 Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position Note As a safety measure if the Key Counter is not being installed cover up the aperture with the Con...

Page 415: ...FPXK43H00 1 Heater Assembly DZHP008182 1 Heater Switch Assembly DZHP008195 2 Connector Holder Bracket DZJE001048 1 RLB PC Board DZEC102536 1 RLB Harness DZFP001118 4 Connectors 1 DHT Harness DZFP001188 3 Connectors Long 1 DF2 Harness DZFP001393 3 Connectors Short 1 Heater SW Label DZNK004269 10 Screw XTB3 6F 1 Installation Instructions DZSM000563 1 Open the ADF Unit 2 Remove 2 Screws 3 Remove the ...

Page 416: ...s 20 Disconnect the Cooling Fan 1 Harness and remove the Interlock Cover 21 Disconnect the HT Harness 22 Remove 7 Screws 23 Remove the Lower Control Panel Cover 24 Turn the Control Panel Unit upside down 25 Secure the DF2 Harness to the existing 2 Harness Clamps Note Route the right side of the harness over the center bracket as illustrated 26 Connect the DF2 Harness to DHT Harness 14 16 18 15 17 ...

Page 417: ...ards the center to give you access to the screw hole 31 Secure the Heater with 1 Screw 32 Insert the left side of the DF2 Harness into the Connector Holder Bracket Note Observe the direction of the bracket in the illustration before inserting the connector 33 Secure the Connector Holder Bracket with 1 Screw 34 Connect the Heater to DF2 Harness 35 Secure the Heater with 1 Screw 36 Secure the Harnes...

Page 418: ...Harness Clamps 38 Secure the DHT Harness with 5 Harness Clamps 39 Secure the DHT Harness with 4 Harness Clamps 40 Route the DHT Harness through the hole in the frame as illustrated 41 Open the Lower Exit Cover 42 Remove 1 Screw 43 Remove 1 Snap Ring 44 Remove the Lower Exit Cover 37 38 39 40 41 43 44 42 ...

Page 419: ...7 Remove 3 Screws 48 Remove the Left Cover 49 Remove 4 Screws 50 Open the Upper Exit Cover 51 Remove the Paper Exit Assembly Note Exercise care not to damage the Inverting Paper Sensor 52 Close the Upper Exit Cover 53 Remove 5 Screws 54 Remove the Exit Guide 55 Remove 2 Screws 56 Partially slide out the EL Bracket Assembly 45 47 48 46 49 49 50 Inverting Paper Sensor 51 53 53 54 55 56 ...

Page 420: ...d CN173 61 Slide the EL Bracket Assembly into the machine 62 Secure the EL Bracket Assembly with 2 Screws 63 Secure the RLB Harness with 4 Harness Clamps 64 Route the RLB Harness through the hole in the frame as illustrated 65 Remove 6 Screws 66 Remove the Lower Rear Cover If the System Console option is installed perform steps 61 62 below 67 Remove 2 Screws 68 Remove the Rear Cover of System Cons...

Page 421: ... 71 Connect the RLB Harness to CN134 on NFL PC Board 72 With the 1st Paper Tray pulled out install the Heater Assembly as illustrated 73 Secure the Heater Assembly with 1 Screw 74 Connect the Heater Assembly to DHT Harness 75 Connect the Harness to Heater Switch Assembly 69 69 70 71 Used for Japanese models only 72 73 74 75 ...

Page 422: ...ess Clamps 79 Remove 1 Screw 80 Remove the Blind Plate 81 Affix the Heater SW Label as illustrated 82 Proceed with the installation of other options If finished reassemble the machine and reinstall all Covers 83 Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position 76 77 78 78 79 80 81 ...

Page 423: ...423 JAN 2006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 8 35 Installing the Stand DA D351 D352 ...

Page 424: ...424 JAN 2006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 ...

Page 425: ...425 JAN 2006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 ...

Page 426: ... 6020 6030 8 36 Replacing the OPC Drum 1 Open the Front Cover 2 Move the Hopper Unit 3 Turn the Developer Unit Lever clockwise 90 4 Turn the ADU Lever counter clockwise 90 5 Loosen 1 Screw 6 Remove the Drum Unit Note When handling the Drum Unit hold the Handle ...

Page 427: ...ote When reinstalling make sure that 2 Hooks are fixed properly 9 Remove the 4 Screws 10 Remove the Front Fixation Plate 11 Turn the Front Support Metal counter clockwise and remove it Caution The OPC Drum is sensitive to light To prevent optical exposure problems do not expose the OPC Drum to direct sunlight or bright light even if it is a 1000 Lux fluorescent lamp ...

Page 428: ...nd remove it 15 Remove the OPC Drum 16 Install New OPC Drum by reverse steps Caution Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the OPC Drum Green and not to touch it with bare hands Caution The OPC Drum is sensitive to light To prevent optical exposure problems do not expose the OPC Drum to direct sunlight or bright light even if it is a 1000 Lux fluorescent lamp ...

Page 429: ... with how data is transferred across the transmission media At the opposite end Layer 7 the Application layer interfaces the network services with the applications software in use on the computer The five layers in between Data Link Network Transport Session and Presentation perform intermediate communication tasks In essence the OSI model is a framework that describes how a function from one comp...

Page 430: ...ionship of the layers 9 1 3 Cable For the network transmission media at the Physical layer on the OSI reference model there are several cable categories available Category 5 8 wire Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP cable is commonly used Shielded Twisted Pair cables are also available The Impedance for the STP UTP Ethernet cable is 100 Ω Category 3 is also used for the 10Base T Ethernet Category Purpose...

Page 431: ...id periodical incident 802 3 Ethernet Frame Format Destination MAC address 6 byte uni cast or broadcast If all 1 on 6 byte FF FF FF FF FF FF means broadcast frame it is detected by an applicable node it must be passed to the upper layer Also if the destination MAC address is not matched with that node the frame is discarded at that node immediately Token Passing Token passing utilizes a frame call...

Page 432: ... token back on the ring Token Frame indicates that the network is available for transmission Data Frame indicates that the network is busy processing a transmission Token Frame Format Data Frame Format There are several different bit types assigned for Frame Status For example 1 and 5 bit indicates that the token has been read 2 and 6 bit indicates that the frame has been copied by another station...

Page 433: ...thernet such as 10Base T uses a star physical topology and a bus logical topology Microsoft uses the term star bus topology to describe 10Base T Speed bps Topology Cable Type Max Length 10Base 5 10M Bus Yellow cable 500 m 1640 ft 10Base T 10M Star Twisted Pair Cat 3 4 5 100 m 328 ft 100Base TX 100M Star Twisted Pair Cat 5 200 m 656 ft 802 3 CSMA CD Network Type 10 BASE 5 10 BASE T Logical speed Mb...

Page 434: ...onnection is easy and flexible for future expansion due to the star topology 9 2 4 Repeater The main purpose of a repeater is to extend the maximum range for the network cabling They operate at the OSI Physical layer and do not filter or interpret the signal they merely repeat regenerate the signal passing all network traffic in all directions They perform signal amplitude delete errors and resche...

Page 435: ...128 to 191 for the first octet but it is the first two octets that make up the network address and the last two octets that make up the host ID Class C IP addresses can range in value from 192 to 223 for the first octet and the first three octets make up the host ID There are class D and E addresses as well For these addresses the first octet is a number greater than 223 These addresses are not cu...

Page 436: ...for non destination address 5 Most significant bit starting with 127 Reserved for loop back address 1 IP 192 168 32 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 192 255 255 255 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Network Address 192 168 32 0 IP Subnet Mask Networ...

Page 437: ...atagram 3 bits are reserved for precedence ID Identification frame number for upper layer communication Flags Packet disassembly information Fragment Offset Offset from most significant bit Time To Live Decrement the counter until 0 every time packet pass over the router Protocol Upper layer protocol identification number ie TCP 06h UDP 11h Header Checksum Checksum is used for error checking on th...

Page 438: ...NAT Network Address Translator This performs conversion of a single global IP Address from to single private IP Address 4 IP Masquerade This performs a conversion of single global IP Address from to multiple private IP Address At the same time the port number is automatically assigned Occasionally the conversion creates a bottleneck in the network overhead For a typical solution PIX Private addres...

Page 439: ...ired the UDP User Datagram Protocol can be substituted for the TCP at the Transport host to host level TCP and UDP operate at the same layer The UDP is a connectionless oriented protocol TCP Segment in IP Datagram IP Header 20 byte Application Data vary TCP segment IP Datagram TCP Header 20 byte TCP Segment Outline Header Length 4 bit Reserved 6 bit Control Flag 6 bit Window 6 byte Source Port 2 b...

Page 440: ...msec The Server responds with an acknowledgement that increments the initial sequential number by one The ACK bit number is also changed to a 1 value The SYN can have and identical ACK response for each packet thus the server and the client can establish a connection SYN Sequential No 4538970 ACK ACK No 4538971 SYN Sequential No 1919424000 ACK ACK No 1919724001 Server Panasonic Device Increments N...

Page 441: ...main Name to exist but not be connected to an actual device This is often done so that a group or business can have an Internet email address without having to establish a real Internet site In these cases some real Internet machine must handle the email on behalf of the listed Domain Name Specification for this name system follows this basic guideline The name must be separated by dots and must s...

Page 442: ...n is completed the information from the DNS Server IP address table is kept in cache memory at each DNS server in accordance with a minimum TTL Time To Live of SOA Start Of Authority record There are two types of Name Servers Primary and Secondary Name Server 9 5 2 Primary Name Server A primary server has the original copy of a zone file Any changes made to the zone file are made to the copy on th...

Page 443: ...c co jp Serial number A version number for the zone file This number should be changed each time the zone file changes it changes automatically if you use DNS Manager to change the zone file Refresh time The time in seconds that a secondary server waits before checking the master server for changes to the database file If the file has changed the secondary server requests a zone transfer Retry tim...

Page 444: ...d The CNAME or canonical name record is an alias nickname enabling you to specify more than one name for each IP address The syntax of a CNAME is shown below alias name CNAME host name Using CNAME records you can combine an FTP and a Web server on the same host Nicknames are useful when a well known host changes its name In this case its usually a good idea to have a CNAME record so people still u...

Page 445: ...0 4 is located in the domain 4 0 32 128 IN ADDR ARPA This reversal of the address is awkward to read but allows for the natural grouping of hosts in a network 9 5 11 Forwarding A Slave Server is a server that always forwards queries it cannot satisfy from its cache to a fixed list of forwarding servers instead of interacting with the name servers for the root and other domains The queries to the f...

Page 446: ...ipient of the mail If the SMTP receiver can accept mail for that recipient it responds with an OK reply if not it responds with a reply rejecting that recipient but not the whole mail transaction The SMTP sender and SMTP receiver may negotiate several recipients When the recipients have been negotiated the SMTP sender sends the mail data terminating with a special sequence If the SMTP receiver suc...

Page 447: ...ata Capability exchange and confirmation of receipt are not required for Simple Mode but may be provided using optional email functions outside the scope of this recommendation 9 7 2 Implementation Requirements for T 37 Simple Mode Table Sender Receiver Required Send data as a single MIME multi page TIFF Profile S file Provide notice in case of local transmission problem Provide a return address o...

Page 448: ...ngle mail recipient IETF Internet Engineering Task Force RFC Request For Comment MIME Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions POP3 Post Office Protocol version 3 SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol DSN Delivery Status Notification MDN Message Disposition Notification TIFF Tagged Image File Format IFD TIFF Image File Directory Offramp gateway Equipment capable of receiving email and relaying to one or...

Page 449: ...nimum set TIFF files The Following tree diagram shows the relationship among profiles and between profiles and coding methods A profile is based on a collection of ITU T facsimile coding methods Class Color Coding Method Remarks S B W MH Internet Fax minimal set F B W MMR MR Internet Fax full mode J B W JBIG Internet Fax mixed mode C Color JPEG lossy Color minimal set L Color JPEG lossless graysca...

Page 450: ...n MH coding set T4 Options 0 or 4 Fill Order Least significant bit first Image Width 1728 A 4 Image Length N total number of scan lines in image New Sub File Type 2 Bit 1 identifies single page of a multi page document Page Number N m page number n followed by total page count m Photometric Interpretation 0 pixel value 1 means black Resolution Unit 2 inch Rows Per Strip Number of scan lines per st...

Page 451: ...e adjective RECOMMENDED means that there may exist valid reasons in particular circumstances to ignore a particular item but the full implications must be understood and carefully weighed before choosing a different course 4 SHOULD NOT This phrase or the phrase NOT RECOMMENDED means that there may exist valid reasons in particular circumstances when the particular behavior is acceptable or even us...

Page 452: ...Image File Format The Sending Internet Fax devices MUST be able to write minimum set TIFF files according to the rules for creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile the S profile which is also compatible with the specifications for the minimum subset of TIFF F in F Profile for Facsimile RFC 2306 The Receiving Internet Fax devices must be able to read minimum set TIFF files Mess...

Page 453: ...er command timeouts Timeouts SHOULD be easily reconfigurable preferably without recompiling the SMTP code The value of timer shown above are recommended by RFC1123 Opening TCP Connection TCP Port No 25 220 sv2 labo pcc com Service ready SMTP Command Reply Procedure HELO sv2 labo pcc com 250 ef1 labo pcc com MAIL FROM xxx sv2 labo pcc com 250 OK RCPT TO yyy sv2 labo pcc com 250 OK DATA 250 Start ma...

Page 454: ...is the end of mail data indication 9 8 5 Send This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more terminals This command is successful if the message is delivered to a terminal 9 8 6 Reset RSET This command specifies that the current mail transaction is to be aborted Any stored sender recipients and mail data must be discarded and all buffers and ...

Page 455: ...d mail action not taken mailbox unavailable E g mailbox busy 451 Requested action aborted local error in processing 452 Requested action not taken insufficient system storage 500 Syntax error command unrecognized This may include errors such as command line too long 501 Syntax error in parameters or arguments 502 Command not implemented 503 Bad sequence of commands 504 Command parameter not implem...

Page 456: ... send the OK and ERR in upper case Responses to certain commands are multi line In these cases which are clearly indicated below after sending the first line of the response and a CRLF any additional lines are sent each terminated by a CRLF pair When all lines of the response have been sent a final line is sent consisting of a termination octet decimal code 046 and a CRLF pair If any line of the m...

Page 457: ...ng any messages or sending any response to the client 9 9 3 POP3 Command Summary Note With the exception of the STAT LIST and UIDL commands the reply given by the POP3 server to any command is significant only to OK and ERR The client may ignore any text occurring after this reply Minimal POP3 Commands USER name valid in AUTHORIZATION state PASS string QUIT STAT valid in the TRANSACTION state LIST...

Page 458: ...K 2 126040 QUIT OK POP Server at sv2 signing off Opening TCP Connection TCP Port No 110 OK POP Server ready 1898 697170952 labo pcc com USER s50055 OK Password required for s50055 PASS xxxx OK s50055 has 2 messages 126040 octets TOP 1 1 OK 69762 octets Text DATA Text DATA PETR 1 OK 69752 octets Text DATA Text DATA Text DATA end with period OK Message 1 has been deleted DELE 2 TOP 2 1 OK 1 56288 oc...

Page 459: ...re taking corrective action you must check the physical connections or wiring first Command Sample Purpose Ping Ping 192 168 1 30 Checking for physical connection between your PC and the target destination 192 168 1 30 Ipconfig all Ipconfig all Checking for current network configuration Host Name DNS server IP address Subnet Mask Default Gateway MAC address WINS etc For Windows 95 98 Me please typ...

Page 460: ...ot supported Not supported Not supported Ask the Network Administrator to setup a new POP account Check the host name by using the DOS command line ping and nslookup Ask the Network Administrator to setup a new POP account Check the host name by using the DOS command line ping and nslookup If not ready If not ready If not ready Yes Is there a MX and A Record entry for your Panasonic Device in the ...

Page 461: ...e address In manual allocation a client s IP address is assigned by the network administrator and DHCP is used simply to convey the assigned address to the client A particular network will use one or more of these mechanisms depending on the policies of the network administrator DHCP client A DHCP client is an Internet host using DHCP to obtain configuration parameters such as a network address DH...

Page 462: ...R not selected Server selected Client Server Commits configuration Discards lease Determines configuration Collects replies Selects configuration Begins initialization Initialization complete Graceful shutdown Determines configuration Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when allocating a new network address DHCPACK DHCPREQUEST DHCPREQUEST DHCPACK Server Client Se...

Page 463: ...ffer DHCPACK not accepted Send DHCPDECLINE DHCPOFFER Collect replies Send DHCPDISCOVER DHCPNAK Lease expired Halt network Select offer send DHCPREQUEST DHCPACK Record lease set timers T1 T2 DHCPACK Record lease set timers T1 T2 DHCPACK Record lease set timers T1 T2 T2 expires Broadcast DHCPREQUEST DHCPNAK Halt network State transition diagram for DHCP clients The client maintains two times T1 and ...

Page 464: ...fications DSN RFC1891 RFC1894 and Message Disposition Notifications MDN RFC2298 respectively Your Panasonic device supports MDN Delivery Status Notification DSN A DSN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions failed delivery delayed delivery successful delivery or the gatewaying of a message into an environment that may not support DSNs Panasonic Iternet FAX does n...

Page 465: ... all or any combination of the TIFF profiles defined in RFC 2301 in addition to profile S As a consequence a sender may use those additional TIFF profiles when sending to a recipient with the corresponding capabilities 1 Request If the sender Internet FAX desires processing confirmation the sender must request Message Disposition Notification when sending the message itself Sender provides the Dis...

Page 466: ...ontent Type multipart mixed boundary Panasonic MDN Request Sample Mime Version 1 0 X Mailer Internet FAX Panasonic Content Transfer Encoding 7bit Date Wed dd Mmm yyyy 15 42 00 0500 Message Id 20020206154203470001 BE948 fax huge com From fax huge com Subject Read Receipt IMAGE from Internet FAX To fax core mega edu In Reply To 5 0 2 5 2 20020206153721 00c44448 huge com References 5 0 2 5 2 20020206...

Page 467: ...0 6030 3 Processing Confirmation The processing confirmation provided by recipient is received and take specific services for expected several conditions respectively This is unit independent issue To see more detailed information please refer to RFC2532 document ...

Page 468: ...OP is associated with most of the risks associated with such protocols in particular it requires that both the client and server machines have access to the shared secret in clear text form Challenge Response Authentication Mechanism CRAM offers a method for avoiding such clear text storage while retaining the algorithmic simplicity of APOP in using only MD5 Normally each POP3 session starts with ...

Page 469: ...al format using lower case ASCII characters When the POP3 server receives the APOP command it verifies the digest provided If the digest is correct the POP3 server issues a positive response and the POP3 session enters the TRANSACTION state Otherwise a negative response is issued and the POP3 session remains in the AUTHORIZATION state Note that as the length of the shared secret increases so does ...

Page 470: ...y layer for subsequent protocol interactions If the requested authentication mechanism is not supported the server rejects the AUTH command with a 504 reply The authentication protocol exchange consists of a series of server challenges and client answers that are specific to the authentication mechanism A server challenge otherwise known as a ready response is a 334 reply with the text part contai...

Page 471: ... SASL is smtp Error Codes The following error codes may be used to indicate various conditions as described 432 A password transition is needed This response to the AUTH command indicates that the user needs to transition to the selected Authentication mechanism This is typically done by authenticating once using the plain authentication mechanism 538 Encryption required for requested authenticati...

Page 472: ... into the corporate intranet and corporate network administrators are extremely unwilling to open the firewall for other incoming services since each opened path represents additional potential security threats This makes Direct Internet Fax XMT attractive because it can operate throughout the organization s Intranet Several new service extensions were assigned 1 The EHLO keyword value associated ...

Page 473: ...10 D11 5V PEWSSN1 GND PAPER SENSOR 1 5V CRRSN1 GND PAPER PATH SENSOR 5V LBSN1 GND UPPER LIMIT SENSOR 5V PESN1 GND PAPER SENSOR 5V PEWSSN2 GND PAPER SENSOR 2 5V PEWSSN3 GND PAPER SENSOR 3 PAPER SENSOR 1 PAPER PATH SENSOR UPPER LIMIT SENSOR PAPER SENSOR PAPER SENSOR 2 PAPER SENSOR 3 CN710 C L 24VM PFCL1 24VM PUSOL1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 S L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 ...

Page 474: ...474 JAN 2006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 memo ...

Page 475: ...sorting non stapled stacks of copies 4 Four Types of Auto Stapling The Finisher offers a choice of four stapling modes 1 point stapling at rear diagonal stapling in front diagonal stapling at rear and 2 point stapling 5 Buffer Roller The use of a buffer roller enables the finisher to accept copies without interruption from the Copier even during stapling or offset operation 6 Saddle Stitch Functio...

Page 476: ... 1 and 2 2 91 in 74 mm high 500 sheets Staple sort Small size 1 Tray 1 and 2 4 33 in 110 mm high 30 sets 750 sheets 2 Large size 1 Tray 1 and 2 2 91 in 74 mm high 30 sets 500 sheets Size Mixing Size mixing 1 73 in 44 mm or less 300 sheets 4 Stapling 0 86 in 22 mm or less 150 sheets 30 sets 4 Stacking Mixing Face down Face up Item Description Stapling By rotating cam Stapling Position See Fig 1 001...

Page 477: ... unit Weight 2 Bin Finisher 76 lb 34 5 kg 2 Bin Saddle Stitch Finisher 115 7 lb 52 5 kg Punch Unit option 11 7 lb 5 3 kg Power Supply Supplied by the copier machine 24 VDC Maximum Power Consumption 170 W or less Item Description Specified Paper width 6 2 mm 4 4 2 mm 4 4 2 mm 5 2 mm 30 30 4 4 2 mm Specified Paper width 6 2 mm A3 and A4 B4 and B5 LDR and LTR 5 2mm 5 2mm 82 7 4 mm 62 7 4 mm 202 7 4 m...

Page 478: ...17 21 in 64 80 g m2 cover page up to 35 5 in 133 g m2 1 Stacking Capacity 10 sets stack of 11 to 15 sheets 15 sets stack of 6 to 10 sheets 25 sets stack of 5 sheets or less Stapling Stapling position 2 points Center distribution fixed interval Staple accommodation 2000 staples Staple supply Special cartridge Staples Special staples FQ SS50 Staple detection Provided Manual stapling Not available Fo...

Page 479: ...n Saddle Finisher Unit Fig 1 002 A3 B4 A4 R Staple Position Center of Staple Center of Staple 210 1 0 mm 216 1 0 mm 88 5 2 0 mm 208 5 2 0 mm 182 1 0 mm 68 5 2 0 mm 188 5 2 0 mm 148 5 1 0 mm 45 2 0 mm 165 2 0 mm 199 7 2 0 mm Stack Front Edge LDR LTR R 79 7 2 0 mm 139 7 1 0 mm 168 2 0 mm 48 2 0 mm ...

Page 480: ...to 133 g m2 1 Punched Hole Diameter 2 holes 6 5 mm 2 or 3 holes 2 holes 8 0 mm 3 holes 8 0 mm 4 holes 6 5 mm Punch Trash Capacity 2 holes 10 000 sheets or more 21 in 80 g m2 or equivalent 2 or 3 holes 2 holes 3 000 sheets or more 3 holes 3 000 sheets or more 4 holes 5 000 sheets or more Power Supply Supplied by the Finisher Unit 24 VDC 5 VDC Power Consumption 120 W or less 2 holes A3 A4 108 5 3 mm...

Page 481: ...ray 1 2 2 Shutter 3 Delivery Roller 4 Swing Guide 5 Feed Roller 2 6 Height Sensor 7 Wrap Flapper 8 Buffer Roller 9 Buffer Inlet Flapper 10 Saddle Stitch Flapper 11 Inlet Feed Roller 12 Feed Roller 1 13 Vertical Path 14 Stapler 15 Knurled Belt 16 Tray Lift Motor 17 Saddle Stitch Unit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 17 16 15 14 13 12 ...

Page 482: ...dle Stitch Unit Fig 1 004 1 Guide Plate 2 Paper Folding Roller 3 Delivery Guide Plate 4 Holding Roller 5 Stitcher Front Rear 6 Inlet Roller 7 No 1 Flapper 8 No 2 Flapper 9 Stitcher Mount 10 Butting Plate 11 Crescent Roller 12 Paper Positioning Plate 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ...

Page 483: ...0 4530 6010 6020 6030 3 Punch Unit Optional Fig 1 005 1 Punch Motor 2 Cam 3 Hole Puncher Punch Blade 4 Die 5 Photosensor PCB 6 LED PCB 7 Horizontal Registration Motor 8 Punch Trash Box Full Detector PCB Unit 9 Punch Trash Container 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 484: ...m the Finisher Unit If the Copier s message indicates a paper jam in the Finisher Unit perform the following to remove the jam Fig 1 006 1 Holding the Finisher Unit as shown move it to detach it from the Copier Fig 1 007 2 Remove any jam visible from the outside Fig 1 008 3 Open the Upper Cover and check the inside of the Finisher ...

Page 485: ...Roller Cover and remove the jam Fig 1 010 5 Lift the Buffer Roller and remove the jam Fig 1 011 6 Return the Buffer Roller and the Buffer Roller Cover to their original positions and close the Upper Cover Fig 1 012 7 Connect the Finisher to the Copier Machine 8 Operate as instructed on the Display ...

Page 486: ...Copier s message indicates that the staples ran out in the Finisher Unit perform the following to supply it with staples Fig 1 013 1 Open the Front Cover Fig 1 014 2 Turn the Green Lever to the down Fig 1 015 3 Pull out the Staple Cartridge in the direction of the arrow as illustrated Fig 1 016 4 Slide the empty Staple Case out ...

Page 487: ... that the new Cartridge is one specifically designed for the Finisher Unit Note Do not remove the Tape used to hold the Staples in place before installing the Staple Cartridge Fig 1 018 6 Pull the length of Tape used to hold the Staples in place straight out Fig 1 019 7 Push the Stapler Unit until it stops and turn the Green Lever to the right to lock Fig 1 020 8 Close the Front Cover ...

Page 488: ...ier s message indicates a staple jam in the Finisher Unit perform the following to remove the jam Fig 1 021 1 Remove the Stack waiting to be stapled from the Delivery Tray Fig 1 022 2 Open the Front Cover Fig 1 023 3 Turn the Green Lever to the down Fig 1 024 4 Pull out the Staple Cartridge in the direction of the arrow as illustrated ...

Page 489: ...ig 1 026 6 Remove all Slid Staple Fig 1 027 7 Push up the Staple Cartridge Tab until it stops 8 Turn the Green Lever to the right to lock Close the Front Cover Note After a Staple Cartridge has been reinstalled the first few sets may not staple This is due to the Staples need to be pre fed to the stapling position ...

Page 490: ...If the Copier s message indicates a paper jam in the Saddle Stitch Unit perform the following to remove the jam Fig 1 028 1 Holding the Finisher Unit as shown move it to detach it from the Copier Fig 1 029 2 Open the Front Lower Cover Fig 1 030 3 Turn the right Green Knob Fig 1 031 4 Turn the left Green Knob while pushing it in ...

Page 491: ...4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 Fig 1 032 5 Open the Saddle Exit Cover 6 Remove jammed paper 7 Close the Saddle Exit Cover Fig 1 033 8 Open the Inlet Cover and remove the jam Fig 1 034 9 Close the Front Lower Cover 10 Connect the Finisher Unit ...

Page 492: ...titch Unit with Staples If the Copier s message indicates the Saddle Stitch Unit ran out of staples perform the following to supply it with staples Fig 1 035 1 Open the Front Lower Cover Fig 1 036 2 Slide out the Saddle Stitch Unit Fig 1 037 3 While pulling the Stitcher Unit towards you swing it upward ...

Page 493: ...y its sides and remove it Fig 1 039 5 Insert the new Cartridge FQ SS50 Note You must always replace both Cartridges at the same time Fig 1 040 6 While pulling the Stitcher Unit towards you swing it downward to return it to its original position Fig 1 041 7 Push in the Stitcher Unit and close the Front Cover ...

Page 494: ... Jams from the Saddle Stitch If the Copier s message indicates a staple jam in the Saddle Stitch Unit perform the following to remove the jam Fig 1 042 1 Open the Front Lower Cover Fig 1 043 2 Slide out the Saddle Stitch Unit Fig 1 044 3 While pulling the Stitcher Unit towards you swing it upward ...

Page 495: ... Hold the Cartridge by its sides and remove it Fig 1 046 5 Push down on the area identified as A and pull up the Tab identified as B Fig 1 047 6 Remove the jammed staple and return the Tab B to its original position Fig 1 048 7 Reinstall the Cartridge to its original position B A B ...

Page 496: ...9 8 While pulling the Stitcher Unit towards you swing it downward to return it to its original position Fig 1 050 9 Push the Saddle Stitch Unit back to its original position and close the Front Lower Cover Note Whenever you remove a jammed Staple be sure to execute staple edging ...

Page 497: ...from the Punch Unit Optional If the display indicates a paper jam in the Punch Unit perform the following to remove the jam Fig 1 051 1 Open the Front Cover of the Punch Unit Fig 1 052 2 Align the triangle mark on the knob within the range marked by Fig 1 053 3 Close the Front Cover of the Punch Unit ...

Page 498: ...498 JAN 2006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 Fig 1 054 4 Open the Top Cover of the Punch Unit Fig 1 055 5 Remove the jam Fig 1 056 6 Close the Top Cover of the Punch Unit ...

Page 499: ...ving Punch Hole Scrap from the Punch Trash Box Optional If the display indicates to empty the Punch Trash Box perform the following to remove the punch trash Fig 1 057 1 Open the Front Cover of the Punch Unit Fig 1 058 2 Pull out the Punch Trash Box Fig 1 059 3 Discard the Punch Scrap ...

Page 500: ...titch Unit use different cartridge types Be sure that the appropriate type is used for each Table 1 004 Fig 1 060 4 Return the Punch Trash Box to its original position No Item Timing 1 Replacing the Staple Cartridge Finisher Unit When the appropriate indication is made on the copier s display 2 Replacing the Staple Cartridge Saddle Stitch Unit ...

Page 501: ...the flow of electrical signals In descriptions of digital circuits of the Finisher 1 indicates a high signal voltage level while 0 indicates a low signal voltage level Voltage values differ according to the circuit A microprocessor is used in the Finisher to control all the finishing functions Descriptions in this chapter also assume that PCBs will not be repaired at user sites For this reason des...

Page 502: ...ontrolled by the Finisher Controller PCB according to the appropriate commands from the Copier Copies from the Copier may be routed to the Saddle Stitch Unit Fig 2 001 Notes 1 The term job offset refers to shifting each sorting job separating a single stack into several stacks Control system Swing guide drive system Alignment drive system Stapler drive system Delivery drive system Feeder drive sys...

Page 503: ... serial communications circuit The Finisher Controller PCB not only communicates with the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB but also communicates the Saddle Stitch Unit s various states information on sensors and switches to the Copier The ICS used on the Finisher Controller PCB are designed for the following Q1 CPU Controls sequence of operations Q2 EP ROM Backs up adjustment values Q7 Contains sequen...

Page 504: ...J134 1 2 3 J122 3 1 2 J118 3 1 2 J121 3 1 2 J129 3 1 2 7 9 8 3 2 1 1 3 2 1 3 2 4 6 5 1 3 2 3 1 2 5 6 7 11 9 10 3 1 2 8 6 7 3 1 2 5V PENT 5V PDEL 5V STPTY 5V STOPN 5V JOGHP 5V STPHP 5V TRYHP J130 3 1 2 J17 7 9 8 J11 3 2 1 J9A 1 3 2 J12B 4 6 5 J9A 4 6 5 J12A 7 9 8 J12A 4 6 5 J202 J208 J207A J205 J207A J210 Finisher Controller PCB When the sensor detects paper 1 When the sensor detects paper 1 When t...

Page 505: ... 1 2 J400 3 1 2 J400 6 4 5 J9A 9 8 7 J14 1 3 2 J14 4 6 5 J24 4 6 5 J12A 1 3 2 J12B 1 3 2 J24 1 3 2 J11 8 10 9 J14 10 12 11 J14 7 9 8 5V DELCLK 5V FSTTRAY 5V SNDTRAY 5V BUFPASS 5V JOINT 5V DROPN 5V BUFENTR 5V SWGOPN 5V SPTCLK1 5V SFTCLK2 J207A J1010 J1020 1 3 2 3 1 2 J204 J201 J201 Finisher Controller PCB While the delivery motor is rotating oscillates between 0 and 1 When paper is present on tray ...

Page 506: ...5 1 2 3 J114 3 4 2 1 J6 2 1 3 4 5V V0 Vin 1 2 1 2 J5 1 3 J5 9 10 3 4 J5 11 12 3 2 1 J7 3 2 1 1 2 J5 7 8 5 4 3 J9B 5 4 3 5V SWGCLK J207B 7 8 9 J112 J209 J209 J206 JI32 J131 3 2 1 J5 4 5 6 24V 24VMOVE DRSW 24VSTPL SWGGCLD 24VHIFT TRAYSAF 24VSHIFT TRYLMT SHUTCLD When the swing motor is rotating oscillates between 0 and 1 Measures the distance between the sensor and the top of the stack on the tray Wh...

Page 507: ...PI22 5V MS8 5V 5V J8 8 J8 10 J8 11 J8 12 J8 7 STPDRHP HOOKEMP STPCON 5V Saddle Stitch Controller PCB Copier J131 8 7 6 5 4 3 J400 1 2 3 4 5 6 J132 1 2 J500 1 2 J3 6 5 4 3 2 1 J19 1 2 24V 24V J2 2 3 4 5 7 J1 1 2 24V Finisher Controller PCB When a stapler is at the home position 0 When staple are present in the cartridge 1 When the stapler is connected 0 Communication line Communication line ...

Page 508: ... 2 J12A 10 11 J12B 9 10 J24 7 8 J9B 1 2 J9A 10 11 J12B 7 8 J10 1 2 3 4 5 6 B A B A 2 1 3 2 2 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 J107 J108 J109 J128 J123 1 2 10 11 11 10 2 1 J207B J207A J500 Finisher Controller PCB 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V BESCPSL ESCPSL PDLSL EXITSL ENTSL FLPSL When 0 the solenoid turns On When 0 the solenoid turns On When 0 the solenoid turns On When 0 the solenoid turns On When 0 the solenoid tur...

Page 509: ...16 17 18 J305 1 2 3 J302 6 5 4 J301 6 5 4 J8 5 4 3 2 1 B A B A B A B A A B A B B A B A J8 13 14 15 6 5 4 3 2 J9B 6 7 8 9 10 J502 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 J17 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 24V 24V 24V 24V According to rotation direction speed changes between and According to rotation direction speed changes between and in sequence According to rotation direction speed changes between and in se...

Page 510: ...its Copier to deliver arriving copies to trays in the appropriate mode simple stacking job offset stapling See Fig 2 009 for a diagram of the 4 delivery modes Fig 2 009 Fig 2 010 Method of delivery Normal delivery Saddle stitch delivery Simple stacking Job offset Staple Front diagonal Rear 1 point Rear diagonal 2 point Normal Delivery Tray Normal Delivery Tray To Saddle Stitch Unit ...

Page 511: ...red with a shift to the front of about 30 mm and the second sort job is delivered without being shifted Whether the first copy or the last copy of a sort job should be shifted is determined by the Copier Fig 2 012 Fig 2 013 Fig 2 014 Tray Copies Tray Copies A B C A B C Feed Roller 1 Feed Roller 2 Delivery Roller Tray Each sort job is stacked alternately Swing Guide Stopper Feed Roller 1 Delivery R...

Page 512: ...Copier is routed to the Saddle Stitch by the Paper Deflecting Plate The Saddle Stitch executes stitching and saddling operations on the copy and then delivers it to the Saddle Stitch Tray For discussions of stacks in the Saddle Stitch see 11 3 4 Fig 2 017 Tray Copies Staple Swing Guide Delivery Roller Feed Roller 1 Stapling tray Stopper Front diagonal stapling 2 point stapling Rear diagonal stapli...

Page 513: ...r Roller Table 2 001 Fig 2 018 2 Buffer Paper Path 1 When stacking copies shown in Table 2 002 the copies pass over the Buffer Roller increasing the distance between copies Table 2 002 Fig 2 019 Copy size Length or width 182 mm or less Typical copy examples A5 R INV R thick stock Copy size Length and width 182 mm or more Typical copy examples A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R LDR LGL LTR LTR R Transparencies ...

Page 514: ...able 2 003 The following shows paper delivery operation in the case of two originals in the staple mode a The first copy is moved in the direction of the Buffer Roller Fig 2 020 b The first copy wraps around the Buffer Roller and at the same time the second copy arrives from the Copier Fig 2 021 c The second copy is laid over the first copy Fig 2 022 Copy size Length 182 to 232 mm and width 182 to...

Page 515: ...The first and second copies are simultaneously pulled into the Stapling Tray Fig 2 023 Caution The second copy as explained here is moved through buffer paper path 1 This fact is omitted from the discussion to avoid interrupting the sequence of operations 1st Copy 2nd Copy ...

Page 516: ...ery Sensor PI3 Stapling Tray Sensor PI4 Buffer Path Paper Sensor PI14 In addition each delivery tray is equipped with a sensor designed to detect the presence absence of paper on it No 1 Tray Paper Sensor PI11 No 2 Tray Paper Sensor PI12 If a copy fails to reach or move past each sensor within a specific period of time the Finisher Controller PCB identifies the condition as a jam and stops the ong...

Page 517: ...tion signal 1 SFTCLK1 Shift motor clock detection signal 2 SFTCLK2 Tray lift motor drive signal Paddle solenoid drive signal PDLSL Second feed motor drive signal First feed motor drive signal Inlet feed motor drive signal Buffer outlet solenoid drive signal EXITSL Buffer inlet solenoid drive signal EXTSL Flapper solenoid drive signal FLPSL Belt escape solenoid drive signal BESCPSL Stapler motor dr...

Page 518: ... tray paper detection signal SNDTRAY No 1 tray paper detection signal FSTTRAY Stapling tray paper detection signal STPTY Buffer path paper detection signal BUFPASS Delivery detection signal PDEL Buffer path inlet paper detection signal BUFENTR Inlet paper detection signal PENT PI11 PI12 PI4 PI3 PI14 PI7 PI1 ...

Page 519: ...ved up the Feed Belts attached to the Feed Roller 2 move the copy to the Stapling Tray The presence of paper on the Stapling Tray is monitored by the Stapling Tray Paper Sensor PI4 The first sheet is fed to the Stapling Tray while the Swing Guide is moving up The Finisher Controller PCB drives the Alignment Motor M3 in advance and keeps the Alignment Plate poised 10mm behind the trailing edge of a...

Page 520: ...sheet to the front Fig 2 029 Delivery Motor M2 First Feed Motor M1 Second Feed Motor M8 Alignment Plate Motor M8 Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor PI6 Swing Guide Open Detection Switch PI8 Swing Guide Closed Detection Switch SW2 Swing Motor M7 Stapling Tray Paper Sensor PI4 Guide Plate Escape Solenoid SL6 Motor CW rotation Motor CCW rotation Swing Guide Offset Sheet Tray 1 2 Delivery Roller Sta...

Page 521: ...20 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 c The Swing Guide moves down and at the same time the Delivery Roller delivers the sheet Fig 2 030 Offset Sheet Tray 1 2 Swing Guide Feed Roller 2 Feed Belts Stopper Delivery Roller Stapling Tray ...

Page 522: ...r Shift Home Position Sensor PI7 to find out whether it is at the home position When starting operation after power on the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Stapler Shift Motor M4 to return the Stapler Unit to the home position If the Stapler is already at the home position then M4 is not turned on Fig 2 031 Fig 2 032 Sheets Stapler Shift Home Position Sensor PI7 Stapler Stapler Shift Motor M4 Fr...

Page 523: ...irst sheet is fed to the Stapling Tray while the Swing Guide is moving up The presence of paper on the Stapling Tray is detected by the Stapling Tray Paper Sensor PI4 The Finisher Controller PCB drives the Alignment Plate Shift Motor M3 when the Stapling Tray Paper Sensor has detected paper to put sheets in order The Alignment Plate is kept poised 10 mm behind the trailing edge of the paper The Sw...

Page 524: ...have moved past the Feed Roller 2 causing the drive of the Second Feed Motor M8 to rotate the Paddle The sheets are pushed by the Paddle and moved to the Stapling Tray Almost simultaneously with the trailing edge of the sheet falling into the Stapling Tray the Belt Escape Solenoid turns off to return the Feed Belts that were in the escape position to its original position and feed the sheet onto t...

Page 525: ...n the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Swing Motor M7 counter clockwise to move down the Swing Guide The Finisher Controller PCB moves the stapler according to the staple mode for stapling From then on it rotates the Delivery Motor M2 clockwise to delivery the stack to the tray Fig 2 038 M8 Stapler 1st Sheet 2nd and Subsequent Sheets Paddles Paddles Paddle Solenoid SL5 Stopper 2nd Feed Motor De...

Page 526: ...kwise or counter clockwise When the Stapling Home Position Sensor is off the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Stapler Motor clockwise until the sensor turns on so as to return the Stapling Cam to its initial state The presence absence of staples inside the Staple Cartridge is detected by the Staple Detecting Switch MS9 The Finisher Controller PCB does not drive the Stapler Motor M6 unless the S...

Page 527: ... Staple detection signal Start signal Mode selected Delivery Motor M2 First Feed Motor M1 Alignment Plate Motor M3 Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor PI6 Swing Guide Open Sensor PI8 Stapling Tray Paper Sensor PI4 Swing Guide Open Closed Detecting Switch MS2 Stapler Home Position sensor PI7 Paddle Solenoid SL5 Stapler Shift Motor M4 Stapler Motor M4 Motor CW rotation Motor CCW rotation Stacking S...

Page 528: ...the Copier after the first sheet has reached the Copier Pre registration Sensor the Stapler moves to the staple wait position to suit the appropriate stapling position and paper size See Fig 2 044 and later for an idea of the wait position according to the stapling mode a Front Diagonal Stapling The position is the same as the stapling position Fig 2 044 b Rear 1 point Stapling The Stapler is kept...

Page 529: ...the stapling position for each stapling operation Fig 2 046 d 2 Point Stapling The Stapler is kept in wait at the center of paper Stapling occurs at two points first at the rear and then at the front Fig 2 047 Stapling Tray Delivery Direction Stopper Stopper Stapler Stapling Position Wait Position Guide Plate Stapling Tray delivery direction Stopper Stopper Stapler Stapling position Stapling posit...

Page 530: ... selected by the Copier so that it is positioned at the delivery slot The upper limit of the tray is detected by the Tray Upper Limit Detecting Switch MS5 The Finisher Controller PCB stops the drive up of the Tray Lift Motor M5 as soon as the Tray Upper Limit Detecting Switch turns on The height of the stack on the tray is identified by the Height Sensor PS1 which measures its distance from the to...

Page 531: ...2 Alignment for stacks containing 750 sheets or more is not guaranteed 3 Stacking height specification is 7 mm Caution 1 The term small size stands for A4 A5 R B5 LTR and INV R 2 The term large size Stands for A3 A4 R B4 B5 R LGL LDR LTR R and FLS Table 2 004 Fig 2 049 Tray Stacking mode Non staple sort Staple sort Small size Large size Mixed sizes Small size Large size Mixed sizes Tray 1 5 79 in ...

Page 532: ...es down to open to enable delivery When the shutter is held at the up position claws slide out of the Swing Guide to engage the back of the shutter This way the existing stack and the Swing Guide engage while the tray is moved preventing the guide from opening The claws slide in when the shutter is moved down to release the engagement The upward movement of the shutter is monitored by the Shutter ...

Page 533: ...The Tray Lift Motor rotates and the tray moves to suit the height of the stack The appropriate height in relation to the existing stack is checked by the Height Sensor PS1 Fig 2 053 Fig 2 054 Second Feed Motor M8 M5 Tray Lift Motor Height Sensor S1 Shutter Open Sensor PI5 Claw Claw Shutter Shutter Closed Detecting Switch MS4 One Way Cam M8 Second Feed Motor ...

Page 534: ...ions shutter drive Move from Tray 1 to Tray 2 Fig 2 055 Second Feed Motor M8 Shutter closed Tray moved Shutter opened Tray moved Tray Lift Motor M5 Shutter Closed Detecting Switch MS4 Shutter Open Sensor PI5 Height Sensor PS1 Correct height detected Motor CW rotation Motor CCW rotation ...

Page 535: ...g shows operation on the buffer paper path 1 When the first sheet arrives the Buffer Inlet Solenoid SL2 remains off The first sheet enters the buffer path Fig 2 056 2 When the leading edge of the sheet has moved past the Buffer Path Inlet Paper Sensor PI17 the Buffer Outlet Solenoid SL3 turns on so as to cause the sheet to wrap around the Buffer Roller Fig 2 057 3 When the leading edge of the shee...

Page 536: ...ate once again Fig 2 059 5 The Buffer Roller continues to rotate and the 2nd sheet stacks on the 1st sheet Fig 2 060 6 When the leading edge of the 2nd sheet has moved past the Buffer Path Paper Sensor PI14 the Buffer Roller stops and waits for the 3rd sheet Fig 2 061 Inlet Sensor PI1 2nd Sheet 1st Sheet 1st Sheet 2nd Sheet Buffer Path Paper Sensor PI14 1st Sheet 2nd Sheet 3rd Sheet ...

Page 537: ...erate the Buffer Outlet Solenoid SL3 turns off so that the path is directed in the direction of delivery The actual switch over will occur after the trail edge of the first sheet has moved past the flapper Fig 2 063 9 The Buffer Roller continues to rotate and all the sheets are fed together towards the Delivery Roller Fig 2 064 Inlet Sensor PI1 3rd Sheet 1st Sheet 2nd Sheet Inlet Sensor PI1 SL3 1s...

Page 538: ...nisher s delivery operation and informs the Copiers DC controller of the presence of a jam When all doors are closed after the paper jam is removed the Buffer Path Inlet Paper Sensor PI17 checks whether or not paper is being detected in addition to the above four sensors Inlet Sensor Delivery Sensor Stapling Tray Sensor and Buffer Path Paper Sensor If the sensors detect paper the Finisher Unit jud...

Page 539: ...uffer Inlet Sensor does not detect paper when an equivalent of 540 mm has been fed after the Inlet Sensor turned on Fig 2 068 Jam check Inlet Sensor PI1 Inlet Feed Motor M9 Jam check Inlet Sensor PI1 Inlet Feed Motor M9 Copier delivery signal Equivalent of 400 mm Normal Copier delivery signal Equivalent of 400 mm Jam Jam check Inlet Sensor PI1 Inlet Feed Motor M9 Equivalent of size x2 Normal Jam c...

Page 540: ...n an equivalent of 480 mm has been fed after the Inlet Sensor turned on Fig 2 071 Jam check Buffer Path Paper Sensor PI14 First Feed Motor M1 Jam check Buffer Path Paper Sensor PI14 First Feed Motor M1 Equivalent of Size x2 Normal Equivalent of Size x2 Jam Jam check Inlet Sensor PI1 Delivery Sensor PI3 First Feed Motor M1 Second Feed Motor M8 Jam check Inlet Sensor PI1 Delivery Sensor PI3 First Fe...

Page 541: ...r the sensor turns on within 0 5 sec after the motor has been rotated counter clockwise 10 Power On Jam 07H The Inlet Sensor PI1 Delivery Sensor PI3 Buffer Path Paper Sensor PI4 and or Buffer Path Inlet Paper Sensor PI17 detects paper at power on 11 Door Open Jam 08H The Joint Sensor PI15 Door Open Sensor PI16 or Door Switch MS1 detects the cover open during operation including the Upper Door Swit...

Page 542: ...Some of the 24 VDC power used to drive motors is cut off when the Door Switch MS1 is open The power to the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB and the Punch Driver PCB however will not be cut off Fig 2 074 is a block diagram showing the power supply system Fig 2 074 11 1 2 3 2 Protection Functions The 24 VDC power line used to drive motors and solenoids is equipped with a Circuit Breaker CB1 for protecti...

Page 543: ...to control all finishing functions Descriptions in this chapter also assume that PCBs will not be repaired at user sites For this reason descriptions of circuits on PCBs is limited to block diagrams Two types of block diagrams are provided for separate functions diagrams indicating details from sensors up to input sections of major PCBs and diagrams indicating details from the output sections of m...

Page 544: ...ors in response to the various commands from the Finisher Controller PCB The Saddle Stitch Controller PCB is also used to communicate the state of various sensors and switches to the Finisher Controller PCB in serial The functions of the major ICs mounted on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB are as follows Q1 Controls the sequence of operations Q2 Contains sequence programs Q3 Controls the sequence...

Page 545: ... J303 1 3 2 J203 3 1 2 J309 1 3 2 J209 3 1 2 J102 1 3 2 J101 3 1 2 J100 3 1 2 J11 15 14 13 J11 10 12 11 J11 7 9 8 J11 6 5 4 J11 1 3 2 J6 7 9 8 5V LUNGECLK 5V FDR 5V EJCVR 5V FLDCLK 5V JOGHP 5V TRYPAR 1 3 2 3 1 2 4 6 5 3 1 2 6 4 5 J106 3 1 2 J6 4 6 5 5V PAPPOS 1 3 2 J502 J209A J402 J302 J202A J202 Saddle Stitch Controller PCB When the Paper pushing plate motor is rotating it pulsates between 1 and ...

Page 546: ... J6 1 3 2 J10 6 8 7 J9 1 3 2 J9 4 6 5 J9 7 9 8 J9 10 12 11 J9 13 15 14 J13 1 3 2 J13 4 6 5 J18 1 3 2 5V PPOSPAR 5V INLTCVR 5V DELV 5V FDRLHP 5V GIDHP 5V LUNGEHP 5V LUNGETOP 5V STPLHP 5V VPJM 5V PAFLDHP J301 J201A J201 1 3 2 4 2 3 J308 J208A J208 2 4 3 3 1 2 J425 J325 2 4 3 3 1 2 J225 J125 Saddle Stitch Controller PCB When paper is present at the paper positioning plate 1 When the inlet cover is cl...

Page 547: ...1 J10 1 2 3 4 5 5V 1STPA 2NDPA 3RDPA STCHHP1 HKEMP1 STCHHP2 HKEMP2 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 J315 3 1 2 J8 3 1 2 J316 3 1 2 J8 10 8 9 5 7 6 5 7 6 5 7 6 5 7 6 J304 J204A J204 J305 JD2 JD1 J120 J306 J121 J4 1 2 J4 3 4 J4 5 6 24V INLTCVRMS FDROPN DELVMS When paper is present at the No 1 paper sensor 1 When paper is present at the No 2 paper sensor 1 When paper is present at the No 3 paper sensor 1 When the...

Page 548: ...B A B A B A B A B A 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 J112 2 1 J4 8 7 J115A 1 2 2 1 J116 1 2 2 1 J117 1 2 J5 1 2 3 4 A A B B J15 5 6 J15 3 4 J15 1 2 2 1 J118 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V FLPSL1 FLPSL2 RLNIPSL When 0 the solenoid turns ON When 0 the solenoid turns ON When 0 the solenoid turns ON The pulse signals change according to the rotation of the motor The state and changes according to the rotation of the motor Th...

Page 549: ...r front Saddle Stitch motor rear J315 4 5 6 7 4 3 2 1 J316 4 5 6 7 J400 1 2 3 4 5 6 J131 8 7 6 5 4 3 J108 1 2 J500 1 2 J132 1 2 J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 J1 1 2 J4 9 10 J8 4 5 6 7 J8 11 12 13 14 4 3 2 1 J305 J120 J306 JD2 JD1 J121 Communication line 24V 24V The state and changes according to the rotation of the motor The state and changes according to the rotation of the motor The state and changes according...

Page 550: ... the resulting stack for delivery to the Delivery Tray according to the commands coming from the Finisher Controller PCB The machine s operation consists of the following 1 Receives the sheets 2 Aligns the sheets 3 Stitches the stack 4 Feeds the stack 5 Folds and delivers the stack Fig 3 008 2 Align the sheets 4 Feeds the stack 5 Folds and delivers the stack 3 Stitches the stack 1 Receives the she...

Page 551: ...are output closer to the delivery slot and the volume of paper that may be output is as follows 15 sheets maximum of 14 sheets of 80g m2 1 sheet of 133g m2 Fig 3 009 2 Aligning the Sheets The Alignment Plates operate to set the sheets in order each time a sheet of paper is sent to the vertical path assembly The Alignment Plates are mounted at the edge of the vertical path assembly The Alignment Pl...

Page 552: ... Stitchers are positioned so that they face the center of a stack The two Stitchers are not operated simultaneously so as to prevent the paper from wrinkling between the two staples and to limit the load on the power supply If only one sheet of paper arrives from the Copier stitching does not take place and the sequence goes to the next operation stack feeding Fig 3 011 Stitcher Staple ...

Page 553: ...ide Plate which has been covering the Paper Folding Rollers also moves down so that the Paper Folding Rollers directly face the stack Fig 3 012 5 Folding Delivering the Stack The Paper Pushing Plate pushes the center of the stack again to move it in the direction of the Paper Folding Rollers In response the Paper Folding Rollers pick the stack along its center and folds it in two The Paper Folding...

Page 554: ... Inlet Roller is handled by the Feed Rollers and the Crescent Roller and held in a predetermined position The Feed Plate moves the sheets by coming into contact with or moving away from the sheets as needed The Alignment Plates sets the stack in order each time a sheet is ejected The Alignment Plates are driven by the Alignment Motor M5S whose position is identified in reference to the number of m...

Page 555: ...folding motor drive signal Paper positioning plate motor drive signal Paper folding motor clock signal FLDCLK Paper pushing motor clock signal LUNGECLK Saddle Stitch Controller PCB 2 2 M3S M1S M5S M8S M2S PI4S PI1S SL4S SL1S SL2S M4S M6S M7S No 1 paper deflecting plate solenoid drive signal FLPSL1 No 2 paper deflecting plate solenoid drive signal FLPSL2 Feed plate contact solenoid drive signal RLN...

Page 556: ...ection signal TRYPAR Guide plate home position detection signal GIDHP Crescent roller position detection signal FDRLHP Delivery detection signal DEIV Paper folding home position detection signal PAFLDHP Vertical path paper detection signal VPJM Paper pushing plate home position detection signal LUNGEHP No 3 paper detection signal 3RDPA No 2 paper detection signal 2NDPA No 1 paper detection signal ...

Page 557: ...sheet from butting against the top of the existing stack Table 3 001 shows the relationship between Sensors and paper sizes Table 3 001 Each Flapper is driven by its own solenoid Table 3 002 shows the relationship between solenoids and paper sizes Table 3 002 Sensor Ledger 11 x 17 in A3 279 x 432 mm B4 LTR R A4 R No 1 Paper Sensor PI18S Used Used Used No 2 Paper Sensor PI19S Not Used Used Used No ...

Page 558: ...g 3 016 No 1 Paper Sensor PI18S Passage of paper No 1 Paper Deflecting Plate Solenoid SL1 OFF No passage of paper SL2 OFF No passage of paper No 2 paper Sensor PI19S No 2 Paper Deflecting Plate Solenoid No 3 Paper Sensor PI20S PI18S PI19S PI20S PI18S PI19S PI20S Top edge Entry of 2nd sheet Entry of 3rd sheet ...

Page 559: ...4 Paper Path 3 sheets Fig 3 017 Passage of paper No 1 Paper Sensor PI18S No 2 Paper Sensor PI19S No 3 Paper Sensor PI20S SL1 SL2 ON Passage of paper No passage of paper OFF PI18S PI19S PI20S Entry of 1st sheet Entry of 2nd sheet Entry of 3rd sheet Top edge PI18S PI19S PI20S ...

Page 560: ... R LTR R Paper Path 3 sheets Fig 3 018 No 1 Paper Sensor PI18S No 2 Paper Sensor PI19S No 3 Paper Sensor PI20S SL1 SL2 ON Passage of paper ON Passage of paper Passage of paper Enty of 1st sheet Enty of 2nd sheet Enty of 3rd sheet Top edge PI18S PI19S PI20S PI18S PI19S PI20S ...

Page 561: ...leading edge of the first sheet reaches the Paper Positioning Plate the Paper Positioning Plate Paper Sensor PI18S turns ON The arrival of the second and subsequent sheets will not be checked since the first sheet will still be over the sensor The Crescent Roller keeps rotating while the sheets are being output butting the leading edge of each sheet against the Paper Positioning Plate and ultimate...

Page 562: ...tor pulses from the Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor PI5S The following briefly describes what takes place when the saddle stitching mechanism operates on two sheets 1 When the first sheet has been ejected the Alignment Plates butts against the left and right edges of the stack first alignment The Alignment Plates leave the home position in advance and remain separated by 10 mm from the edges ...

Page 563: ... 5 The Alignment Plates butt against the stack once again during which stitching takes place Fig 3 025 6 The Alignment Plates separate by 10 mm from the edges of the stack after which folding and delivery take place Fig 3 026 7 When the first sheet of the following stack reaches the No 1 Paper Sensor the Guide moves to a position 10 mm from the edge of the stack and prepares for the next alignment...

Page 564: ...ery period 4 Move to following stack size poised position Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor PI5S Alignment Motor M5S Paper Positioning Plate Motor M4S Entry of 1st sheet Entry of 2nd sheet 1st sheet of following stack entry 1 2 3 4 Alignment Escape Paper Positioning Plate Alignment Plate Alignment Motor M5S Alignment Plate Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor PI5S Stack ...

Page 565: ...Roller Phase Sensor PI12S The flag for the Crescent Roller Phase Sensor is mounted to the Crescent Roller Shaft The flag will leave the Sensor while the Roller Shaft rotates turning the Sensor ON or OFF enabling the assumption that the Crescent Roller is positioned at the opposite side of the stack fig 3 032 The Alignment Plates are operated to correspond with this change in the state of the Senso...

Page 566: ...6030 Fig 3 032 Fig 3 033 Alignment operation is started when the flag has covered the sensor and the crescent roller is away from the stack Crescent Roller Phase Sensor PI12S Alignment operation Feed Motor M1 1st sheet 3rd sheet 2nd sheet 4th sheet Feed motor stops ...

Page 567: ...nsor MS7S MS5S for detection of position and a Staple Sensor MS6S MS4S for detection of the presence absence of staples The Stitcher Base is designed so that it may be drawn out to the front from the Saddle Stitch for replacement of the Staple Cartridge or removal of a staple jam The Stitcher Unit in Sensor PI16S is used to make sure that the Stitcher Base is properly fitted to the Saddle Stitcher...

Page 568: ... for initiating the Stitcher Motor startup current helps decrease the load on the Power Supply The Stitcher Home Position Sensor MS7S MS5S is used to monitor the movement of the Rotary Cam enabling identification of individual stitcher operations The presence absence of staples inside the Staple Cartridge fitted to the Stitcher is detected by the Staple Sensor MS6S MS4S The Alignment Plates keep b...

Page 569: ...te Top Position Sensor PI15S are used to detect the position of the Paper Pushing Plate After being folded in half by the Paper Folding Rollers the stack is moved ahead by the Delivery Roller for delivery The Delivery Roller is driven by the Paper Folding Motor The Delivery Sensor PI11S is mounted to the Delivery Assembly to detect delivery of paper The Tray Paper Sensor PI6S is used to detect the...

Page 570: ...er Feeding Roller lower contacts the Paper Feeding Roller upper only at the center of the roller to prevent the paper from wrinkling As the Paper Feeding Roller lower contacts the Paper Feeding Roller upper at their entire surfaces on the remaining half of the peripheral area paper folding starts from this half of the peripheral area and paper is fed while it is being folded The stop position of t...

Page 571: ...n Fig 3 042 Paper folding feeding is performed Paper feeding is performed Stack of Sheets Paper Pushing Plate Paper Feed Inlet Sensor Flag Delivery Outlet Paper Folding Home Position Sensor PI21S Paper folding feeding is performed Paper feeding is performed Paper feed inlet Delivery outlet Sensor flag Paper folding home position sensor PI21S ...

Page 572: ... normally and the Paper Pushing Plate returns to its home position while the stack is being delivered This way a stack requiring a large force may properly be folded with less pressure a The Paper Pushing Plate pushes the stack in the direction of the Paper Folding Rollers Fig 3 044 Motor CW Motor CCW Paper Folding Motor M2S Paper Pushing Plate Motor M8S Paper Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor PI...

Page 573: ...The Paper Folding Rollers grip the stack for a length of about 20 mm Fig 3 045 c The Paper Folding Rollers rotate in reverse pushing back the stack for a length of about 20 mm reverse feeding Fig 3 046 Paper Folding Motor M2S 20mm approx M2S Paper Folding Motor 20mm approx ...

Page 574: ...7 Fig 3 048 M2S M8S Paper Folding Motor Paper Pushing Plate Motor Paper Folding Motor M2S Paper Pushing Plate Motor M8S Paper Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor PI14S Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor PI15S Delivery Sensor PI11S Tray Paper Sensor PI6S Paper Folding Home Position Sensor PI21S Motor CW Motor CCW Equivalent of 20mm reverse feeding Equivalent of 20mm Gripping of paper stack ...

Page 575: ...al to the Copier In response the Copier may stop copying operation and indicate the presence of a jam on the Control Panel Fig 3 049 Table 3 003 No Sensor PI11S Delivery Sensor PI14S Paper Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor PI15S Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor PI17S Vertical Path Paper Sensor PI18S No 1 Paper Sensor PI19S No 2 Paper Sensor PI20S No 3 Paper Sensor PI11S PI15S PI14S PI17S P...

Page 576: ... do not turn OFF when the stack has been fed for a specific period after the No 1 Paper Sensor PI18S turns ON The Paper Sensor used varies according to the paper size a Ledger 11 x 17 in A3 279 x 432 mm Stack Fig 3 051 T Inlet Sensor PI1 No 1 Paper Sensor PI18S Feed Motor M1S T 100 mm Delivery speed mm sec T Inlet Sensor PI1 No 1 Paper Sensor PI18S Feed Motor M1S T 100 mm Delivery speed mm sec Jam...

Page 577: ... Sensor PI19S Feed Motor M1S T feeding of paper length x 1 5 mm T T No 1 Paper Sensor PI18S No 2 Paper Sensor PI19S Feed Motor M1S T feeding of paper length x 1 5 mm T T Normal Normal Jam Jam Load stops No 1 Paper Sensor PI18S No 2 Paper Sensor PI19S No 3 Paper Sensor PI20S No 3 Paper Sensor PI20S Feed Motor M1S T feeding of paper length x 1 5 mm T T T No 1 Paper Sensor PI18S No 2 Paper Sensor PI1...

Page 578: ...he Respective Cover is open during operation 8 Stitcher Staple Jam 86H When the Stitcher Motor M7S M6S is rotating clockwise the Stitcher Home Position Sensor MS7S MS5S does not turn ON within 0 5 sec after it has turned OFF In addition the sensor turns ON within 0 5 sec after the motor has been rotated counter clockwise Reference When all doors are closed after the user has removed the jam the Sa...

Page 579: ...e three door Switches is open The 24V line is used for the generation of 5V power intended for sensors Fig 3 057 2 Protective Mechanisms The 24VDC Power Supply used for motors and solenoids is equipped with a Circuit Breaker CB1 The 24V Power Supply used to drive the Feed Motor M1S Alignment Motor M5S and the Paper Positioning Plate Motor M4S is equipped with a fuse designed to blow when an overcu...

Page 580: ...red at user sites For this reason descriptions of circuits on PCBs is limited to block diagrams Two types of block diagrams are provided for separate functions diagrams indicating details from sensors up to input sections of major PCBs and diagrams indicating details from the output sections of major PCBs up the components 11 1 4 1 1 Outline The Punch Unit option is attached on the feed path betwe...

Page 581: ...I2P PI3P N O N O MS1P MS2P J102 3 2 1 J105 1 2 3 J104 2 3 1 J1A 1 2 3 J1B 6 5 4 J1B 2 3 1 5V SREGHP 5V PUNCHCLK 5V PUNCHHP J5 1 2 J5 3 4 24V 5V 5V UDROPN FDROPN PTR1 PTR2 PTR3 PTR4 PTR5 J115 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J7 12 11 10 9 8 7 13 SREG1 SREG2 SREG3 SREG4 PAEND Punch Driver PCB When the punch slide unit is at the home position 1 When the punch motor is rotating oscillates between 1 and 0 When the hole p...

Page 582: ...tration Motor LED5 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 J116 6 5 4 3 2 1 J7 1 2 3 4 5 6 LEDON5 LEDON4 LEDON3 LEDON2 LEDON1 LED6 PTR6 J1B 8 7 9 10 5V LEDON DFULL When 1 LED is ON When light is blocked 0 M1P M2P J114 1 2 J114 5 4 3 2 1 J2 1 2 J1A 7 8 9 10 11 B A B A 24V According to direcrtion of motor rotation changes between and The pulse signal is switched according to motor rotation Punch Driver PCB ...

Page 583: ...0 6020 6030 3 Outputs from Punch Driver PCB 3 3 Fig 4 004 Finisher Controller PCB Punch Driver PCB J21A 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J21B 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J3A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 J3B 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 J4 4 3 2 1 24V ...

Page 584: ...Light Sensors Photosensor PCB are located at the upper side of the inlet paper feed path of the Punch Unit and a set of five LEDs LED PCB are located at the lower side These Sensors and LEDs function as five Sensors The Frontmost Sensor LED5 PTR5 are the Trailing Edge Sensor and are used for detecting the trailing edge of the paper The remaining Sensor LED1 to LED4 PTR1 to PTR4 are Horizontal Regi...

Page 585: ...etection signal LED6 PTR6 DFULL Horizontal registration home position PI1P detection signal SREGHP Horizontal registration motor M2P drive signal Horizontal registration detection signal LED1 to 4 PTR1 to 4 SREG1 to 4 Punch motor clock PI2P detection signal PUNCHCLK Punch home position PI3P detection signal PUNCHHP Punch motor M1P drive signal 5 4 3 2 PTR1 5 4 3 2 LED1 ...

Page 586: ...2 hole type while the other half can be as a 3 hole type Whether the Punch Shaft is used as a 2 hole punch or a 3 hole punch depends on the instructions from the Copier 1 2 4 hole Type At the home position the Punch Home Position Sensor is ON Punching of the first sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated in the forward direction 180 and the state of the Punch Home Position Sensor has changed fr...

Page 587: ...0 6020 6030 b A hole is punched in the trailing edge of the second sheet Fig 4 007 punch shaft stopped home position punch shaft is rotated 90 in the reverse direction hole punched punch shaft is rotated 180 in the reverse direction punch operation completed ...

Page 588: ...tion hole puncher rise direction on the remaining half peripheral area on the Punch Shaft To punch three holes the 2 Hole Puncher is moved reciprocally in the escape direction hole puncher rise direction The following illustrates punching when two sheets are punched with two holes a A hole is punched in the trailing edge of the first sheet Fig 4 008 When two holes are punched the 3 Hole Puncher is...

Page 589: ...ncher rise direction as shown below Fig 4 011 punch shaft stopped home position punch shaft is rotated 90 in the reverse direction hole punched punch shaft is rotated 180 in the reverse direction punch operation completed punch shaft stopped home position punch shaft is rotated 90 in the reverse direction hole puncher rises to topmost position punch shaft is rotated 180 in the reverse direction ho...

Page 590: ... Punch Unit the Horizontal Registration Motor M2P starts to move the Punch Slide Unit towards the front Fig 4 012 2 After the Horizontal Registration Sensors LED1 to 4 PTR1 to 4 detect the edge of the paper at its inner side in keeping with the paper size signals arriving from the Copier the Horizontal Registration Motor M2P drives the Punch Slide Unit to a predetermined position further towards t...

Page 591: ...is started the Horizontal Registration Motor M2P is operated in the reverse direction and the Punch Slide Unit is returned to its home position where it comes to a stop 5 Even if paper to be punched continues to arrive the Punch Slide Unit returns to its home position for each arriving sheet and steps 1 to 4 are repeated Fig 4 015 Punch Inlet Feed Motor M9 First Feed Motor M1 Trailing Edge Detecti...

Page 592: ...s used for driving Sensors and the ICs on the Punch Driver PCB 24V power to the Motors is not supplied when either of the two Door Switches on the Punch Unit is open Fig 4 016 2 Protection Function The 24V power supplies for the Punch Motor M1P and Horizontal Registration Motor M2P are equipped with a fuse designed to blow when an overcurrent flows Finisher Controller PCB 24V 24V 5V 5V 5V Upper Do...

Page 593: ...Reassemble parts in reverse order unless otherwise indicated 3 Reassemble Screws to their original locations ensuring their correct length and diameter 4 As a rule do not operate the Machine with any parts removed 11 1 5 1 1 External Components 1 Removing of the Front Door Assembly Fig 5 001 Figures in parentheses indicate the number of mounting Screws Fig 5 002 1 Open the Front Door Assembly 1 2 ...

Page 594: ...over Fig 5 003 1 Open the Upper Door Assembly 1 2 Remove the 3 Screws 2 and lift the Rear Cover 3 to remove Fig 5 004 1 Open the Upper Door Assembly 1 2 Remove the 2 Claws 2 and remove the Upper Door Assembly Fig 5 005 1 Open the Front Door Assembly 1 2 Remove 1 Screw 2 and remove the Front Cover 3 Upper Door Assembly Rear Cover 2 Screws 1 3 1 2 1 2 3 ...

Page 595: ...r Ground Wire 2 and release the Harness Stop 3 Fig 5 007 4 Remove the Slide Guide 4 5 Remove the End Cap F 5 and End Cap R 6 6 Carefully lift the Tray Rack Assembly 7 to remove Fig 5 008 Caution When reinstalling the Tray Rack Assembly back into the Finisher Assembly before inserting it be sure to release the Tray Lift Motor Gear Clutch 1 with a Screwdriver or a similar object Take extra care duri...

Page 596: ...upporting the Tray Rack Assembly to its lowest position See Fig 5 008 3 Remove the Slide Guide 1 4 Remove 5 Screws 2 M4 5 Remove 1 Screw 3 M3 and remove the Grate Shaped Upper Guide 4 Fig 5 010 1 Remove the Tray Rack Assembly See Fig 5 006 2 Remove 3 Screws 1 M4 3 Remove 3 Screws 2 M3 and open the Grate Shaped Lower Guide 3 to the front Fig 5 011 4 Free the Harness 5 from the Harness Stop 4 5 Disc...

Page 597: ...Screws 2 and remove the Right Guide Assembly 3 Fig 5 013 1 Remove the Tray Rack Assembly See Fig 5 006 2 Remove the Grate Shaped Upper Guide See Fig 5 009 3 Remove the Grate Shaped Lower Guide See Fig 5 010 4 Remove the Harness from the 2 Harness Stops 1 and disconnect the 4 Connectors 2 5 Remove 1 Screw 3 and remove the Stapler Stay Holder 4 Fig 5 014 6 Open the Front Cover 5 and push the Stapler...

Page 598: ...598 JAN 2006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 Fig 5 015 7 Remove the RB Link Spring 7 Fig 5 016 8 Remove 3 Screws 8 and draw out the Swing Unit 9 towards you 7 8 8 8 9 ...

Page 599: ... Remove the Harness Leads 2 from 2 Harness Stops 1 at the PCB Base and disconnect 2 Connectors 3 Fig 5 018 3 Remove the Ground Lead 4 and 3 Screws 5 and pull down the PCB 6 towards you Fig 5 019 4 Remove the Harness Leads 8 from 2 Edge Saddles 7 and remove the PCB Base Fig 5 020 5 Remove 3 Screws 9 and remove the Feed Drive Unit 10 1 1 2 3 6 5 5 4 7 7 8 9 9 9 10 ...

Page 600: ...t back on the Finisher Unit loosen the Move Gear Stop Screw 11 to relieve the tension and then fasten the Screw after attaching the Feed Drive Unit The Move Gear Attachment must be adjusted when removing and attaching the Swing Unit If you forget to fasten the Screw the Gear Teeth may disengage resulting in defective feed 11 ...

Page 601: ...uide Support Plate Assembly 2 to draw out the Harness Leads 3 towards the Buffer Roller Assembly side Fig 5 023 4 Remove the Front Cover See Fig 5 005 5 Remove 1 Screw 4 and remove the Guide Support Plate Assembly 5 Then remove the Buffer Roller Assembly 6 Fig 5 024 1 Open the Front Cover and move the Stapler Assembly to the front 2 Remove 1 Screw 3 Turn the Green Tab to the left pull out the Stap...

Page 602: ...CB Fig 5 025 4 Disconnect 1 Connector 4 of the Stapler Assembly 3 and remove the Earth Ground Fig 5 026 5 Remove 2 Screws M4 used to hold the Stapler Cover Fig 5 027 1 Remove the Rear Cover See Fig 5 003 2 Disconnect 16 Connectors 1 3 Remove 4 Screws 2 and remove the Finisher Controller PCB 3 4 3 5 Stapler Cover 2 2 2 1 3 ...

Page 603: ...Assembly 2 Removing the Rear Lower Cover Fig 5 028 Figures in parentheses indicates the number of mounting Screws Fig 5 029 1 Open the Lower Door Assembly 1 2 Remove 1 Screw 2 and remove the Bushing 3 and then remove the Front Lower Door Assembly Fig 5 030 1 Remove 4 Screws 1 and remove the Rear Lower Cover 2 Front Lower Door Rear Lower Cover 4 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 ...

Page 604: ...2 Remove 1 Screw 2 and remove the Folding Roller Knob 3 3 Remove 5 Screws 4 and remove the Front Inside Cover 5 Fig 5 032 1 Lift up the Open Close Lever 2 of the Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly 1 and open the Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly Fig 5 033 2 Remove the Door Shaft 3 in the direction of the arrow and draw out towards the front of the Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly 4 1 4 4 2 3 5 4 1 2 4 3 ...

Page 605: ...e Harness Leads from the Harness Stop 5 and Edge Saddle 6 4 Disconnect 2 Connectors 7 and remove the Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly 8 Fig 5 035 1 Remove the Grate Shaped Lower Guide See Fig 5 010 2 Remove 2 Screws 1 and Ground Lead 2 and remove the Upper Delivery Guide Assembly 3 Fig 5 036 1 Remove 4 Screws 4 and remove the PCB Cover 2 5 7 8 6 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 ...

Page 606: ... 3 Remove the Front Lower Door Assembly See Fig 5 030 4 Remove the Rear Lower Cover See Fig 5 031 5 Remove the Front Inside Cover See Fig 5 032 6 Remove the Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly See Fig 5 033 7 Remove the Upper Delivery Guide See Fig 5 036 8 Remove the PCB Cover See Fig 5 037 9 Disconnect 2 Connectors 1 and remove 2 Screws 2 Fig 5 038 10 Remove Harness Stop 3 and Harness Lead 4 Fig 5 039 ...

Page 607: ...0 Fig 5 040 12 Remove 2 Screws 6 and remove the Saddle Stitch Unit 7 by moving it in the upward direction Fig 5 041 Caution When removing the Saddle Unit from the Finisher Unit Body prevent the Timing Belt 8 from catching on the Communications Cable Bracket 9 6 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 608: ...ly See Fig 5 030 2 Remove the Front Inside Cover See Fig 5 032 3 Remove the Upper Delivery Guide See Fig 5 036 4 Remove the PCB Cover See Fig 5 037 5 Disconnect 2 Connectors 1 Fig 5 043 6 Disconnect 2 Connectors 2 remove 3 Screws 3 and remove the Paper Pushing Motor Mount 4 Fig 5 044 7 Remove the Tension Springs front 5 rear 6 Fig 5 045 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 ...

Page 609: ... the rear Fig 5 047 9 Remove 2 C Rings 10 and remove the 2 Gears 11 on the front Fig 5 048 10 Remove 2 Bearings 12 Fig 5 049 11 Open the Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly 13 12 Remove 2 Screws 14 and remove the 2 Alignment Plates 15 13 Slide the Paper Folding Roller 16 to the front and pull it out in the delivery direction 8 7 9 11 10 12 14 13 14 16 15 ...

Page 610: ...r Mount Unit Fig 5 050 1 Attach the Gear 2 so that the grooved section 1 on the Gear is facing the grooved section 1 on the Paper Folding Roller to align the phases Fig 5 051 1 Remove the Front Inside Cover See Fig 5 032 2 Remove 1 E Ring 1 Roller 2 and Shaft 3 Fig 5 052 3 Pull out the Stitcher Mount Unit 4 to the front 1 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 611: ... Remove 3 Screws 1 and remove the Saddle Stitch Mount Unit Cover 2 Fig 5 054 6 Remove the Saddle Stitch Positioning Tool 3 from the back of the Cover Fig 5 055 7 If you must adjust the Front Saddle Stitch remove the Center Guide Plate 5 and Front Guide Plate 4 one screw each If you must adjust the Rear Saddle Stitch remove the Center Guide Plate 5 and the Rear Guide Plate 6 one screw each Fig 5 05...

Page 612: ...7 9 Insert the Tool 10 into the Staple Slot of the Saddle Stitch 9 Fig 5 058 10 Shift down the Saddle Stitch and turn the Saddle Stitch Gear so that the boss on the Tool 11 and the recess of the Mount Match Then tighten the Screws 12 on the Mount to fix them in place 9 10 12 11 ...

Page 613: ...4 3 Remove 2 Screws 5 slide the Positioning Plate Unit 6 once towards the front and remove from the rear side Fig 5 060 1 Remove the Rear Cover See Fig 5 003 2 Remove the Lower Rear Cover See Fig 5 031 3 Remove the Claw 1 of the No 1 Deflect Plate Bushing and pull out the No 1 Deflect Plate Shaft 2 toward the rear The procedure is the same for the No 2 Paper Deflect Plate Fig 5 061 4 After detachi...

Page 614: ...ving the Right Guide Assembly Fig 5 062 1 Remove the PCB Cover See Fig 5 037 2 Remove 4 Screws 1 and 14 Connectors 2 and remove the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB 3 Fig 5 063 Figures in parentheses indicate the number of mounting Screws Fig 5 064 1 Remove 5 Screws 1 and remove the Right Guide Assembly 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 Upper Cover 3 Front Door Upper Cover 2 Right Guide Assembly 5 1 3 2 4 1 1 2 ...

Page 615: ...emove 3 Screws 2 and slacken the inner side of the Right Cover 3 to remove the Upper Cover 4 from the hook Fig 5 066 1 Remove the Upper Cover See Fig 5 066 2 Disconnect 1 Connector 1 3 Remove 2 Screws 2 and remove the Punch Motor 3 Fig 5 067 1 Remove the Right Guide Assembly See Fig 5 065 2 Disconnect 1 Connector 1 3 Remove 2 Screws 2 and slide the Horizontal Registration Motor 3 in the direction ...

Page 616: ... Punch Slide unit open 1 Remove the Right Guide Assembly See Fig 5 065 2 Remove the Upper Cover See Fig 5 066 3 Remove the Photosensor PCB See Fig 5 078 4 Hold the 2 Lock type Tie Wraps 1 between your fingers to remove Exercise care not to cut the Tie Wraps when removing 5 Disconnect 3 Connectors 2 6 Remove Harness Lead 4 from the 3 Harness Stops 3 Fig 5 069 7 Remove the E Ring 5 and Puncher Sprin...

Page 617: ...tate the Gear 7 in the direction of the arrow and slide the Punch Slide Unit Assembly 8 to the front Fig 5 071 9 Disconnect the Connector 9 and remove 1 Screw 10 and Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor 11 Fig 5 072 10 Remove 2 Screws 12 and Sensor Base 13 8 7 9 11 10 12 12 13 ...

Page 618: ...Disconnect the Connector 14 Fig 5 074 12 Rotate the Gear 7 in the direction of the arrow and slide the Punch Slide Unit Assembly 8 away from you Fig 5 075 13 Lift up the front side of the Punch Slide Unit Assembly and then slide the Unit in the direction of the arrow to remove 14 8 7 ...

Page 619: ... Punch Slide Unit Assembly See Fig 5 069 2 Remove 1 Screw 1 and the LED PCB 2 Fig 5 077 1 Remove the Upper Cover See Fig 5 066 2 Remove 2 Screws 1 and remove the Sensor Plate 2 3 Disconnect the Connector 2 and remove the Photosensor PCB 4 Fig 5 078 1 Remove the Right Guide Assembly See Fig 5 065 2 Remove 1 Screw 1 disconnect the Connector 2 and remove the Punch Trash Box Full Detector PCB Unit 3 2...

Page 620: ...DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 4 Removing the Punch Driver PCB Fig 5 079 1 Remove the Punch Unit from the Finisher 2 Remove 4 Screws 1 disconnect 4 Connectors 2 and remove the Punch Driver PCB 3 1 1 1 3 2 2 ...

Page 621: ...he Machine may need to be replaced once or more times because of wear or tear during the machine s warranty period Replace them as necessary 11 1 6 2 1 Finisher Unit 11 1 6 2 2 Saddle Stitch Unit 11 1 6 2 3 Punch Unit option No Name Parts No Qty Estimated Life Remarks 1 Stapler FB2 9999 000 1 500 000 operations 5 000 operations cartridge 2 Feed belt FB4 6656 000 2 1 000 000 copies 3 Paddle FG5 817...

Page 622: ...0 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 11 1 6 3 PM Interval Item Interval Work Remarks Feed Belt When preventive maintenance is performed on the copier Cleaning Use moist cloth Paddle Transmission Sensor Punch Unit option Use dry cloth ...

Page 623: ...d At the same time LED1 turns OFF d Shift all bits on SW3 to OFF and turn OFF the Copier once 2 Adjusting the Alignment Position If you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB or if an alignment fault occurs adjust as follows Performing the steps will affect all paper sizes a Remove the Rear Cover of the Finisher Unit b Set SW3 of the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated Fig 7 002 c If you are u...

Page 624: ...b Set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated Fig 7 004 c If you are using A4 paper press SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB If you are using LTR paper press SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB Pressing SW1 or 2 will open the Swing Guide and cause the feed belt to rotate d Within 5 sec after pressing the Switch place one sheet of A4 LTR paper between the Alignment Plate and the Guide Plate ...

Page 625: ... rear in 0 3 mm increments Fig 7 006 g Press SW1 and SW2 simultaneously This will open the Swing Guide and cause the feed belt to rotate Placement of one sheet of A4 LTR paper will cause the Finisher to start stapling h Check the stapling position If good set all bits of SW3 to OFF If re adjustments are necessary go back to step f Caution The settings held by the Finisher Controller PCB are change...

Page 626: ...r Device in the freed direction Fig 7 007 a Set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated Fig 7 008 b Turn the Copier OFF then back ON again c Set the mode setting on the Copier to 1 and the number of originals A4 or LTR to 3 in the staple mode d Press the copy start key Copying starts three sheets for the first copy are output as a stack on the Staple Tray and copying stops with the copies ...

Page 627: ...her Controller PCB has been replaced proceed to step j Fig 7 010 i Turn the Copier ON and then press SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB The current setting values are displayed at LED1 The adjustment width is 0 72 mm for each N 1 Table 7 001 j Turn the Copier OFF and then set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated Fig 7 011 Adjustment value 0 Lights for 1 second once Adjustment value N Bl...

Page 628: ...of the copy paper If this happens the stacked sheets are pushed out by subsequent output sheets This sometimes increases the alignment deviation See the stacking example below Fig 7 013 If this happens a Turn over the paper in the Paper Tray and load the paper again If upward curling is larger than before the paper was loaded again return the paper in the Paper Tray to its original orientation Fro...

Page 629: ...setting this mode if sheets with little curling or downward curling sheets are output and stacked the Stacking Tray is lowered too far For this reason sheets are sometimes stacked away from the stacking wall Fig 7 015 Set this mode after carefully checking the type of paper used by the customer Fig 7 015 6 Setting the Downward Curling Sheet Mode 1 Outline Downward curling of sheets stacked on the ...

Page 630: ...g sheet mode a Turn the Copier OFF b Set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated Fig 7 017 c Turn the Copier ON When the Machine enters the downward curling sheet mode the stop position of the Stacking Tray is raised by about 10mm when stack sheets are output so that output sheets are stacked without being away from the stacking wall After setting this mode if sheets with little curling or...

Page 631: ...ose on the old DIPSW1 If for any reason you must change the following position perform the following steps a Remove the PCB cover and set bits 1 through 4 of DIPSW1 on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB as indicated Fig 7 019 b Remove the Rear Cover of the Saddle Stitch Unit and tape the actuator of the Inlet Cover Open Sensor PI9S and the Inlet Cover Open Detection Switch MS1S of the Saddle Stitch ...

Page 632: ...e the settings of bits 6 through 8 on DIPSW1 referring to Table 7 001 below If the width adjustment is 0 The stitching position and the folding position match requiring no change If for positive width adjustment Set DIPSW1 so that the difference resulting from subtraction of the interval from the appropriate setting in Table 7 001 is provided For instance if the DIPSW1 is currently set to 2 and th...

Page 633: ...tion registers which Punch Unit is attached to the IC on the Punch Driver PCB so that the Punch Unit can be identified by the Finisher For this reason this operation must be performed when the Punch Driver PCB has been replaced This operation however is not necessary on the Japanese market as the 2 Hole Puncher is already registered as the default for new service parts The following describes a re...

Page 634: ... of times that LED1 on the Finisher Controller PCB lights For this reason how dirty the Transmission Sensor is serves as a guide for when to perform cleaning during periodic maintenance a Remove the Rear Cover of the Finisher Unit b Set bits 1 through 6 of DIPSW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated Fig 7 026 c Press SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB Pressing this Switch lights LED1 on the...

Page 635: ... 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 11 1 7 2 Component Location 11 1 7 2 1 Finisher Unit 1 Sensors Fig 7 027 PI16 PI11 PI12 PI5 PI7 PI21 PI22 PI1 PI9 PI15 PI19 PI8 PI4 PI3 PI6 PI14 PI10 PI20 PS1 PI17 PI18 ...

Page 636: ...etects delivery motor clock pulses PI11 Detects paper on Tray 1 PI12 Detects paper on Tray 2 PI14 Detects paper in the buffer path PI15 Detects the finisher joint PI16 Detects the state open of the Door PI17 Detects paper at the inlet to the buffer path PI18 Detects the state open of the Swing Guide PI19 Detects tray lift motor clock pulses 1 on sensor PCB PI9 Detects tray lift motor clock pulses ...

Page 637: ...cts the state open of the front door and the upper door MS2 Detects the state closed of the swing guide 1 MS3 Detects the safety range MS4 Detects the state closed of the shutter MS5 Detects the tray at the upper limit MS6 Detects the state closed of the swing guide 2 MS8 Detects the presence absence of staples inside stapler MS5 MS1 MS4 MS8 MS3 MS6 MS2 ...

Page 638: ...0 6030 3 Motors Fig 7 029 Table 7 007 Name Notation Function Motor M1 First Feed motor M2 Delivery motor M3 Alignment motor M4 Stapler shift motor M5 Tray lift motor M6 Staple motor M7 Swing motor M8 Second feed motor M9 Inlet feed motor M7 M8 M1 M9 M5 M4 M6 M3 M2 ...

Page 639: ... 4530 6010 6020 6030 4 Solenoids Fig 7 030 Table 7 008 Name Notation Function Solenoid SL1 Flapper solenoid SL2 Buffer inlet solenoid SL3 Buffer outlet solenoid SL5 Paddle solenoid SL6 Escape solenoid SL7 Belt escape solenoid SL6 SL3 SL5 SL7 SL1 SL2 ...

Page 640: ...640 JAN 2006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 5 PCBs Fig 7 031 Tabl3 7 009 Reference Name 1 Finisher Controller PCB 2 Relay PCB 4 3 Relay PCB 3 4 Sensor PCB 1 2 4 3 ...

Page 641: ...2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 11 1 7 2 2 Saddle Stitch Unit 1 Photo interrupters Fig 7 032 PI18S PI19S PI20S PI16S PI9S PI14S PI21S PI2S PI11S PI6S PI5S PI3S PI4S PI1S PI7S PI8S PI17S PI13S PI12S PI15S ...

Page 642: ...itioning plate at home position PI8S Detects paper on the paper positioning plate PI9S Detects the state open of the inlet cover PI11S Detects paper in the delivery area PI12S Detects the phase of the crescent roller PI13S Detects the guide at home position PI14S Detects the paper pushing plate at home position PI15S Detects the paper pushing plate at top position PI16S Detects the state in of the...

Page 643: ...hes MS1S Detects the state open of the inlet door MS2S Detects the state open of the front door MS3S Detects the state open of the delivery door MS4S Detects the presence of staples rear MS5S Detects stitching home position rear MS6S Detects the presence of staples front MS7S Detects stitching home position front MS3S MS2S MS6 7S MS4 5S MS1S ...

Page 644: ...tors Fig 7 034 Table 7 012 Name Notation Function Motor M1S Feed Motor M2S Paper Folding Motor M3S Guide Motor M4S Paper Positioning Plate Motor M5S Alignment Motor M6S Stitcher Motor rear M7S Stitcher Motor front M8S Paper Pushing Plate Motor M2S M8S M5S M1S M4S M3S M6S M7S ...

Page 645: ...0 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 4 Solenoids Fig 7 035 Table 7 013 Name Notation Function Solenoid SL1S No 1 Paper Deflecting Plate Solenoid SL2S No 2 Paper Deflecting Plate Solenoid SL4S Feed Plate Contact Solenoid SL4S SL2S SL1S ...

Page 646: ...646 JAN 2006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 5 PCBs Fig 7 036 Table 7 014 Reference Name 1 Saddle Stitch Controller PCB 2 Paper Sensor PCB 1 2 ...

Page 647: ... 6020 6030 11 1 7 2 3 Punch Unit option 1 Photo interrupters Fig 7 037 Table 7 015 Name Notation Function Photo interrupter PI1P Horizontal registration home position detection PI2P Punch motor clock detection PI3P Punch home position detection PI1P PI3P PI2P ...

Page 648: ...2006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 2 Micro Switches Fig 7 038 Table 7 016 Name Notation Function Micro Switches MS1P Upper door open detection MS2P Front door open detection MS1P MS2P ...

Page 649: ...649 JAN 2006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 3 Motors Fig 7 039 Table 7 017 Name Notation Function Motor M1P Punch Motor M2P Horizontal Registration Motor M1P M2P ...

Page 650: ...650 JAN 2006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 4 PCBs Fig 7 040 Fig 7 018 Reference Name 1 Punch Driver PCB 2 Photosensor PCB 3 LED PCB 4 Punch Trash Box Full Detector PCB 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 651: ...uments and adjustments must be to high accuracy Do not touch them in the field 1 Finisher Controller PCB Fig 7 041 Table 7 019 Switch Function SW1 Adjust the height sensor alignment plate position stapling position and move the trays up etc SW2 Adjust the alignment plate position staple position and move the trays down etc SW3 Adjust the height sensor alignment plate position and stapling position...

Page 652: ... correction of discrepancy between stitching position and folding position DIPSW1 bits 6 8 Stores corrected settings for stapling position and folding position SW2 Starts correction of discrepancy between stitching position and folding position SW1 J18 J13 J2 1 3 1 7 1 6 15 J11 10 10 1 1 2 J1 J7 J4 1 1 CB1 14 1 8 1 4 1 5 1 J8 J15 J5 J12 1 9 1 15 J6 1 8 J10 J9 ...

Page 653: ...her Controller PCB Turn the Copier OFF then ON Is the problem corrected Yes End Wiring Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the sensors normal No Correct the wiring Power Supply Measure the voltage between J6 2 and J6 4 on the Finisher Controller PCB Is it 5 VDC No Replace the Finisher Controller PCB Connector Is J6 on the Finisher Controller PCB J114 on the height sensor or the r...

Page 654: ... as soon as the delivery motor starts to rotate No Replace the Finisher Controller PCB Yes Check the wiring from the motor to the controller PCB If normal replace the motor Cause Checks Yes No Action Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor PI6 Check the alignment plate home position sensor Is it normal No Replace the sensor Wiring Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the alignment pl...

Page 655: ... Switch 2 MS6 Is the swing guide closed detection switch 2 normal No Replace the microswitch Is the swing guide closed detection switch 2 pressed correctly No Correct mechanical operation Yes Replace the Finisher Controller PCB Swing Motor M7 Does the swing motor rotate in reverse at a specific timing No Replace the motor Finisher Controller PCB Yes Replace the Finisher Controller PCB Swing Guide ...

Page 656: ...t switch Yes Lower the tray Tray Upper Limit Switch MS5 Check the tray upper limit switch Is the switch normal No Replace the switch Wiring Check the wiring from the Finisher Controller PCB to the tray upper limit switch Is the wiring normal No Correct the wiring Finisher Controller PCB Yes Replace the Finisher Controller PCB Does the tray move up down No Go to a on the left Yes Go to c on the lef...

Page 657: ...rrect mechanism from the shutter upper lower bar to the gear of the feed roller 2 Shutter Open Detection Sensor PI5 Is the shutter open detection sensor normal No Replace the sensor Finisher Controller PCB Yes Replace the Finisher Controller PCB Shutter Closed Detection Switch MS4 Is the shutter closed detection switch normal No Replace the switch Check the safety range switch Is the switch normal...

Page 658: ...dle Stitch Controller PCB Replace the paper positioning plate motor Is the problem corrected Yes End No Replace the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB Cause Checks Yes No Action Paper Folding Motor Clock Sensor PI4S Check the paper folding motor clock sensor Is the sensor normal No Replace the sensor Paper Folding Home Position Sensor PI21S Check the paper folding home position sensor Is the sensor norm...

Page 659: ... sensor normal No Replace the sensor Saddle Stitch Controller PCB Does the alignment motor operate at a specific timing Yes Replace the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB No Check the alignment plate drive mechanism If a fault is found correct it Otherwise go to step 3 Saddle Stitch Controller PCB Replace the alignment motor Is the problem corrected Yes End No Replace the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB Ca...

Page 660: ...paper pushing plate motor clock sensor Is the sensor normal No Replace the sensor Cause Checks Yes No Action Guide Home Position Sensor PI13S disconnected Are the connectors of the guide home position sensor and the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB connected correctly No Connect the connectors Wiring Is the wiring between the sensor and the Saddle Stitch broken Yes Correct the wiring Power Supply Is 5...

Page 661: ...tage between J19 1 and J19 2 on the Finisher Controller PCB Is it 24V No Replace the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB Yes Check the wiring between J19 on the Finisher Controller PCB and J1 on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB If a fault is found correct it Otherwise replace the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB Front Door Switch MS2S Check the front door switch Is the switch normal No Replace the switch Fro...

Page 662: ...chanism Punch Motor M1P No Replace the punch motor Punch Driver PCB Replace the punch driver PCB Is the problem corrected No Replace the Finisher Controller PCB Yes End Cause Checks Yes No Action Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor PI1P Check the horizontal registration home position sensor Is the sensor normal No Replace the sensor Wiring Is the wiring between the horizontal registration...

Page 663: ...the punch driver PCB at power ON E7 21 Delivery Motor M2 Delivery Motor Clock Sensor PI10 A specific number of clock pulses have not been obtained from the delivery motor clock sensor at the beginning of operation Clock pulses in numbers equivalent to a feed length of 200 mm are not obtained while paper is being fed E7 22 Alignment Motor M3 Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor The alignment plate ...

Page 664: ...nd within 15 sec after the tray lift motor is driven The tray home position can not be detected after the tray lift motor has been driven for 15 sec Tray Upper Limit Detection Switch MS5 The tray upper limit detection switch is ON while the tray is moving up Tray Lift Motor M5 Tray Lift Motor Clock Sensor 1 2 PI9 PI19 Clock pulses from the clock sensor 1 2 are not obtained for 200 ms after the tra...

Page 665: ...been driven for 0 455 sec or more The guide home position sensor does not turn OFF even after the guide motor has been driven for 1 sec or more E7 44 Alignment Motor M5S Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor PI5S The alignment plate home position sensor does not turn ON even when the alignment motor has been driven for 0 5 sec or more During initial operation the motor is driven for 1 67 sec The al...

Page 666: ...sconnected Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor PI15S Connector The connector of the paper pushing plate top position sensor is identified as being disconnected E7 50 Inlet Door Switch MS1S Front Door Switch MS2S Delivery Door Switch MS3S After any of the following three photo interrupters used for the covers has found that its respective door is closed the inlet door switch is identified as be...

Page 667: ...00 ms The puncher does not return to the punch home position sensor even after the punch motor has operated for 200 ms The target number of clock pulses cannot be obtained from the punch motor clock sensor at start of operation E7 29 Horizontal Registration Motor M2P Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor PI1P The puncher does not leave the horizontal registration home position even after th...

Page 668: ...stalled correctly 2 Exit options connector is shorted or broken 3 Exit options connector is defective 4 Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or broken 5 Finisher CPU PCB is defective 6 LVPS connector is shorted or broken 7 LVPS is defective 8 CPU PCB connector CN15 is shorted or broken 9 CPU PCB is defective U11 Finisher copy paper removal Note When clearing U11 all paper must be removed from bin...

Page 669: ...B connector CN15 is shorted or broken 11 CPU PCB is defective U31 Finisher Saddle Unit paper removal 1 Copy paper is already in finisher saddle unit 2 Copy paper which is unsuitable size is in saddle unit 3 Too many copy paper in saddle unit 4 Finisher saddle unit paper detecting sensor connector is shorted or broken 5 Finisher saddle unit paper detecting sensor is defective 6 Finisher CPU PCB con...

Page 670: ...is defective 4 Saddle unit CPU PCB connector is shorted or broken 5 Saddle unit CPU PCB is defective 6 Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or broken 7 Finisher CPU PCB is defective 8 LVPS connector is shorted or broken 9 LVPS is defective 10 CPU PCB connector CN15 is shorted or broken U35 Finisher Saddle Unit Saddle Paper Exit Cover open 1 Is the saddle paper exit cover closed correctly 2 Saddle...

Page 671: ...Escape Solenoid Drive Signal EXITSL Buffer Outlet Solenoid Drive Signal FLPSL Flapper Solenoid Drive Signal FSTTRAY Tray 1 Paper Detect Signal HOOKEMP Hook Empty Detect Signal HOOKTOP Hook Stop Position Detect Signal JOGHP Alignment Plate HP Detect Signal JOINT Joint Detect Signal PDEL Delivery Detect Signal PDLSL Paddle Solenoid Drive Signal PENT Inlet Paper Detect Signal SFTCLK1 Shift Motor Cloc...

Page 672: ...gnal 2 GIDHP Paper Guide Home Position Detect Signal HKEMP1 Hook Empty Detect Signal 1 HKEMP2 Hook Empty Detect Signal 2 INLTCVR Inlet Cover Open Detect Signal INLTCVRMS Inlet Cover Open Switch Signal JOGHP Alignment HP Detect Signal LUNGECLK Lunge Motor Clock Signal LUNGEHP Lunge Home Position Detect Signal LUNGETOP Lunge Top Position Detect Signal PAFLDHP Paper Fold Home Position Detect Signal P...

Page 673: ...ON3 LED3 ON Signal LEDON4 LED4 ON Signal LEDON5 LED5 ON Signal PAEND Paper End Detect Signal PUNCHHP Punch Home Position Detect Signal PUNCHCLK Punch Motor Clock Detect Signal SREG1 Side Registration Detect Signal 1 SREG2 Side Registration Detect Signal 2 SREG3 Side Registration Detect Signal 3 SREG4 Side Registration Detect Signal 4 SREGHP Side Registration Home Position Detect Signal UDROPN Uppe...

Page 674: ...t Machine 3 2 1 J117 3 J117 2 J117 1 4 J130 3 5 J130 2 6 J130 1 7 J210 3 8 J210 2 9 J210 1 10 J107 2 11 J107 1 J12A 5V G JOINT 5V G TRYHP 5V G STPHP 24V FLPSL J12A 3 2 1 J112 1 J112 2 4 J131 1 5 J131 2 6 J131 1 7 J132 1 8 J132 2 9 J209 1 10 J209 2 11 J209 3 J5 24V DRSW 24VMOVE 24VSHIFT TRAYSAFE 24VSHIFT TRYLIM 24VSHIFT 24VMOVE 12 J209 4 SWGGCLD J5 3 2 1 J206 1 J206 2 J206 3 4 J115 2 5 J115 1 J7 3 ...

Page 675: ...2 1 2 J32 TRYPAR J128 3 10 5V J128 2 11 G J128 1 12 LUNGEHP J129 3 13 5V J129 2 14 G J129 1 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 LUNGETOP J4 J4 J1 J1 J108 2 J108 1 J112 2 J112 1 J205 2 J205 1 J110 2 J110 1 J109 2 J109 1 J121 2 J121 1 J121 3 J121 4 J121 5 J121 6 J121 7 J120 1 J120 2 J120 3 J120 4 J120 5 J120 6 J120 7 J8 13 14 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 12 J8 J15 J15 J5 J5 13 14 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ...

Page 676: ... 2 1 J102 3 J102 2 J102 1 4 5 6 7 J101 4 8 J101 3 9 J101 2 10 J101 1 11 J1A 5V SREGHP G B 24V A B A J1A 3 2 1 J104 3 J104 2 J104 1 J105 3 J105 2 J105 1 4 5 6 7 J112 4 8 J112 3 9 J112 2 10 J112 1 11 J1B G 5V PUNCHHP G PUNCHCLK 5V LEDON 5V DFULL G G 24V J1B 3 2 1 J10 6 J10 5 J10 4 J10 3 J10 2 J10 1 4 5 6 7 J11 7 8 J11 6 9 J11 5 10 J11 4 J7 LEDON5 LEDON4 LEDON3 LEDON2 LEDON1 G SREG4 PAEND SREG3 SREG2...

Page 677: ...of Bins 2 Modes Sort Mode Hole Punch Mode Staple Mode Lower Bin only Shift Mode Lower Bin only Loading Capacity Non Staple Sort Upper Bin 100 sheets Lower Bin 1 000 sheets Staple Sort Lower Bin 30 sets regardless the number of sheets max 30 sheets set Shift Operation Shift 23 mm Lower Bin only LTR A4 only Size W D H 15 9 x 20 5 x 17 2 in 420 x 520 x 430 mm not including the Finisher Stand Weight A...

Page 678: ...hift Mode Staple Mode Hole Punch Mode Upper Bin No No Yes Lower Bin LTR A4 only Yes Yes Yes ABCDE FGHIJK 6 2 mm 6 2 5 mm ABCDE FGHIJK 6 2 mm 6 2 5 mm 60 D B A C2 C1 A A B l C1 C2 l D 80 0 5 mm 6 0 5 mm Less than 2 mm 10 5 1 0 mm 106 0 5 mm 8 0 5 mm Less than 2 mm 9 5 1 0 mm North America Europe Others D B A A C2 C1 A ...

Page 679: ...ed in 2 bins 20 lbs 80g m2 small size paper not stapled 3 Improved Paper Transport Performance Copy paper 16 34lbs 60 133g m2 can be used Max 28 lbs 105g m2 for staple and punch mode 4 Shift Copies of each job can be discharged to the foreground position so that copies in a bin can be sorted A4 LTR Only 11 2 1 3 External Parts Front Cover Paper Exit Face Up Upper Tray Top Cover Rear Cover I F Cabl...

Page 680: ...er Unit Punch Clutch CL2 Punch Registration Clutch CL1 Paper Upper Surface Detecting Sensor PC10 Exit Sensor Face Up PC2 Paper Feed Sensor PC1 Jogging Home Position Sensor PC6 Jogging Motor M2 Punch Box Detecting Sensor PC12 Gate Solenoid SL1 Elevation Ceiling Sensor PC5 Belt Motor M3 Elevating Motor M4 Elevating Bottom Sensor PC11 Paper Pass Sensor PC8 Set Switch SW1 Belt Home Positon Sensor PC4 ...

Page 681: ...ower Bin Punch Exit Punch the end of paper and discharge the paper into lower bin from interstage stack 11 2 2 1 5 Lower Bin Staple Exit Jog the paper one by one at interstage stack then staple when they reach specified number and discharge into lower bin 11 2 2 1 6 Punch Staple Exit Punch the end of paper jog the paper one by one at interstage stack staple when they reach specified number and dis...

Page 682: ...pper Tray The Paper Transport Sensor detects the paper when the Transport Motor M1 is driven and each roller is rotated Then the Path Select Gate is switched to the direction of A by Gate Solenoid and the paper is discharged into the Upper Tray by the Exit Roller Transport Switching Mechanism A Upper Tray Face Up Exit Roller Bearing Exit Sensor Straight Registration Roller Bearing Punch Registrati...

Page 683: ...es through the Registration Roller Path Gate Paddle Roller and is received by the stack After the paper is detected by the Paper Path Sensor and jogged the Belt Motor is driven and the paper is discharged into the Lower Tray Paper Stack Paddle Roller Path Select Gate Paper Feed Sensor Lower Tray Registration Roller Paper Stack Paper Pass Sensor Belt Motor Belt Motor Paper Pass Sensor Belt Belt Hom...

Page 684: ...d by the Punch Unit CL1 is turned OFF the driving force is transmitted to the Registration Roller and the paper is transported 11 2 2 3 2 Punch Unit Drive Mechanism Punch Unit is composed of Guide A B Punch Bar Cam Cam Lifter Drive Shaft and Single Punch Clutch CL2 11 2 2 3 3 Punch Unit Drive When the Transport Motor is driven the Punch Unit s drive gear rotates the Punch Unit s clutch gear But th...

Page 685: ...ism Jogging and shift operations are carried out by the Jogging Bar and Shift Bar which are moved by the pinion which is driven by the A and B movement of the Jogging Motor M2 Gear The Holding Spring pushes the rack toward the pinion to ensure proper engagement of the Rack and Pinion The Jogging Bar s range of movement differs depending on the paper size A4 LTR only Home Position Detection The Jog...

Page 686: ...otor s rotation drives the stapler by rotating the cam via a gear The link is in contact with the Cam When the Cam revolves the link moves around its supporting point Stapling Mechanism 2 Staple Cartridge FQ SS32 Staple Motor Cam Staple Sensor Staple Home Position Sensor Cartridge Sensor Staple Table Staple Table Staple Plate Cam ...

Page 687: ...when the Paper Upper Surface Detecting Sensor is activated When the Elevation Ceiling Sensor is activated a signal indicating that the Tray is empty is transmitted to the Host 2 When the Paper Full Detecting Sensor is activated after papers are discharged the Lower Tray moves until the Paper Full Sensor is deactivated 3 When the Lower Tray is fully loaded and both the Elevation Bottom Sensor and P...

Page 688: ...efficient P M a Vacuum cleaner b Blower brush c Isopropyl alcohol d Cleaning cotton e Lint free wiper Kim wipes f Cotton swabs 11 2 3 3 Cleaning Recommendations 1 Refer to the appropriate PM cycle on the maintenance chart where the cleaning cycles is broken down by Finisher Note Use of Isopropyl Alcohol IPA is strongly suggested and only to be used when dry cleaning is ineffective Excessive use of...

Page 689: ...4 Remove the Top Cover 2 Shoulder Screws 2 Removal of the Hole Punch Unit 1 Remove the External Covers 2 Remove the Hole Punch Unit Harness x2 3 Remove the Tension Spring 4 Remove the Tension Bracket 1 Screw 1 E ring Note When the tension bracket is reinstalled use the left side screw hole for the 3 Hole Punch Unit and the right side screw hole for the 4 Hole Punch Unit 5 Remove the Hole Punch Uni...

Page 690: ...U PCB 1 Remove the External Covers 2 Disconnect all the Connectors 3 Remove the CPU PCB Mounting Screws 4 Screws 5 Removal of the Registration Roller Clutch 1 Remove the Harness from the Harness Clamp 9 positions 2 Remove the CPU PCB Mounting Bracket 3 Screws 3 Remove the Registration Clutch Mounting Screw 1 Set Screw 4 Remove the Registration Clutch Connector x1 5 Remove the Registration Clutch 2...

Page 691: ...g Front Rear 1 E Ring each 4 Remove the Registration Roller 7 Removal of the Transfer Motor 1 Remove the CPU PCB Mounting Bracket 2 Loosen the Tension Bracket Mounting Screw 3 Disconnect the Transfer Motor Connector 4 Remove the Transfer Motor Mounting Bracket 3 Screws 1 Connector 5 Remove the Transfer Motor Knob 1 Screw 6 Remove the Transfer Motor Belt 7 Remove the Transfer Motor from the Bracket...

Page 692: ...cket 2 Remove the Transfer Motor Mounting Bracket 3 Remove the Tension Bracket Mounting Screw 4 Remove the Tension Spring 5 Remove Timing Belt 1 6 Loosen the Tension Bracket Mounting Screw of Timing Belt 2 7 Remove Timing Belt 2 9 Removal of the Paddle Roller 1 Remove the Front and Rear Cover 2 Remove the CPU PCB Mounting Bracket 3 Remove the Upper Left Panel 2 Screws Shoulder Screw on the front s...

Page 693: ...he Harness Clamp 6 Remove the Upper Guide Plate for the Inverting Paper Exit 4 Screws 7 Remove the Inverting Guide Plate 4 Screws 8 Remove the Tension Spring 2 positions Front Rear Note Use the upper hole when the Spring is reinstalled 9 Remove the Gear and Bushing Front Rear 1 E Ring each 10 Remove the Paddle Roller 6 5 6 4 7 7 8 8 9 10 ...

Page 694: ...ont side 3 Disconnect the Harness Connector of the Left Panel 4 Remove the Inverting Paper Exit Roller Bushing Rear 1 E Ring 5 Remove the Inverting Idle Gear 1 E Ring 6 Remove the Inverting Drive Gear and Bushing Front 2 E Rings 7 Remove the Inverting Paper Exit Roller 11 Removal of the Straight Paper Exit Roller 1 Remove the External Covers Front and Rear 2 Remove the CPU PCB 3 Remove the Upper L...

Page 695: ...r Bushing Rear 1 E Ring 7 Remove the Straight Paper Exit Roller 12 Removal of the Path Select Gate 1 Remove the External Covers Front Rear 2 Remove the Top Cover 2 Screws 3 Remove the Gate Solenoid with Mounting Bracket 2 Screws 1 Spring 1 Gate Arm and 1 Connector 4 Remove the Straight Paper Exit Sensor Connector 5 Remove the Upper Guide Plate for the Straight Paper Exit 2 Screws and 2 Springs 4 5...

Page 696: ... Adjust the solenoid bracket mounting position so that the Gate Arm is contacting the Solenoid 13 Removal of the Belt Drive Motor 1 Remove the Outer Covers 2 Remove the Drive Belt 3 Remove the Belt Drive Motor Unit 3 Screws and 1 Connector 4 Remove the Belt Drive Motor Mounting Bracket 1 2 Screws 5 Remove the Pulley 1 E Ring 4 6 2 3 5 4 4 ...

Page 697: ...he Lever 2 Screws 4 Remove the Discharge Brush 2 Screws 15 Removal of the Inverting Paper Exit Discharge Brush 1 Remove the External Covers Front Rear 2 Remove the CPU PCB 3 Remove the Upper Left Panel 4 Remove the Discharge Brush 2 Screws 16 Removal of the Tractor Belt 1 Remove the External Covers Front Rear 2 Remove the Lower Left Panel Front Rear 3 Remove the Harness Connector of the Left Panel...

Page 698: ...ob for paper jam removal 1 Screws 8 Remove the Tractor Belts x2 Note When the Belt is reinstalled install the Belt so that the Belt tooth just under the Plastic Hook is aligned with the slit on the Pulley 17 Removal of the Staple Unit 1 Open the Staple Cover 2 Remove the Staple Connector x1 3 Remove the Staple Unit 6 7 8 8 2 3 ...

Page 699: ... Area Discharge Brushes x2 1 Screw each 19 Removal of the Jogging Motor 1 Remove the Dust Box 2 Remove the Cover 2 Screws 3 Disconnect the Jogging Motor Connector 4 Disconnect the Jogging Home Position Sensor Connector x1 5 Remove the Jogging Unit 3 Screws 6 Remove the Jogging Motor Cover 2 Screws 7 Remove the Jogging Motor 2 Screws 2 2 5 2 2 6 6 3 4 5 5 5 ...

Page 700: ...raight 7 Paper Path Sensor PC8 Detects paper jam and trigger of the Jogging Bar operation 8 Paper Exit Sensor Inverting PC3 Detects paper jam and paper exit Inverting 9 Belt Home Position Sensor PC4 Detects home position of the belt 10 Elevation Ceiling Sensor PC5 Detects ceiling of the Lower Tray 11 Jogging Home Position Sensor PC6 Detects home position of the Jogging Bar 12 Sheet Detecting Senso...

Page 701: ...11 2 4 1 3 Belt Motor Control 1 The Motor for discharging papers out of stack is a two phase exciting type 2 phase pulse motor Its control circuit is shown below 2 Each pulse signal output from P20 P21 P22 P23 of IC1 in P C B PWB A excites and rotates the coil in each phase 3 Motor is stopped when P20 P21 P22 P23 of IC1 change to Low signal level and the power supply to motor coil is cut off M1 8 ...

Page 702: ...1 11 2 4 1 5 Staple Motor Control 1 Staple Motor which carries out stapling is a 24V DC motor Its control circuit is shown below 2 It is controlled by the combination of signals from P32 and P33 of IC1 in P C B PWB A 3 Stapling is done when H and L are output from P32 and P33 respectively 4 If an anomaly occurs during stapling P32 and P33 changes to L and H respectively inverting the Staple Motor ...

Page 703: ...h Its control circuit is shown below 2 Clutch is turned ON when signal L is transmitted from P27 of IC1 in PC Board PWB A 11 2 4 1 8 Punch Clutch Control 1 Punch Clutch which drives Punch Unit is a 24V electromagnetic clutch Its control circuit is shown below 2 Punching is done when signal L is transmitted from P26 of IC1 in PC Board PWB A SM SM 1 2 SL1 1 2 10 PJ4 DC24V DC5V 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 1...

Page 704: ...Sensor IC1 P45 9 Stapler Home Position Detecting Signal 5 Staple Sensor IC1 P46 8 Staple Detecting Sensor 6 Cartridge Sensor IC1 P13 7 Staple Cartridge Detecting Signal 7 NC 6 Ground 8 Staple Motor 5 Staple Motor Drive Signal 9 Staple Motor 4 10 NC 3 Not Used 11 Staple Motor 2 Staple Motor Drive Signal 12 Staple Motor 1 5V 0V Home 0V 5V Staple 0V 5V Cartridge 0V 5V 0V 24V Normal Rev Inverse Rev 0V...

Page 705: ... 24V 2 DC 24V 3 Belt Motor A IC1 P23 3 Belt Motor Drive Pulse A 4 Belt Motor B IC1 P22 4 Belt Motor Drive Pulse B 5 Belt Motor A IC1 P21 5 Belt Motor Drive Pulse A 6 Belt Motor B IC1 P20 6 Belt Motor Drive Pulse B 7 Elevation Motor IC1 P30 Elevation Motor 1 Elevation Motor Drive Signal 8 Elevation Motor IC1 P31 2 Elevation Motor Drive Signal 9 24V Gate Solenoid 1 DC 24V 10 Gate Solenoid Signal IC1...

Page 706: ... Motor Drive Pulse A 5 Joging Motor A IC12 Q2 4 Joging Motor Drive Pulse B 6 Joging Motor B IC12 Q4 3 Joging Motor Drive Pulse B No Signal Name Connection Input Output Function 1 24V Transport Motor 8 DC 24V 2 GND 7 Ground 3 5V 6 DC 5V 4 GND 5 Ground 5 H L 4 Ground 6 Transport Motor Clock IC1 P10 3 Transport Motor Drive Speed Pulse Signal 7 Transport Motor ON OFF IC1 P35 2 Transport Motor Drive ON...

Page 707: ...IC1 P26 2 Punch Clutch Drive Signal 3 24V Punch Registration Clutch 1 DC 24V 4 Punch Registration Clutch Signal IC1 P27 2 Punch Registration Clutch Drive Signal No Signal Name Connection Input Output Function 1 GND Paper Exit Sensor Inverting 3 Ground 2 Paper Exit Sensor Inverting Signal IC1 P01 2 Invert Exit Paper Detecting Signal 3 5V 1 DC 5V No Signal Name Connection Input Output Function Norma...

Page 708: ... 7 GND Paper Feed Sensor 3 Ground 8 Paper Feed Sensor Signal IC1 P40 2 Paper Feed Detecting Signal 9 5V 1 DC 5V No Signal Name Connection Input Output Function 1 GND Paper Full Detecting Sensor 3 Ground 2 Paper Full Detecting Sensor Signal IC1 P44 2 Lower Tray Paper Full Detecting Signal 3 5V 1 DC 5V No Signal Name Connection Input Output Function 0V No Paper 0V 5V 5V 0V No Paper 0V 5V 5V 0V No Pa...

Page 709: ...er Path Sensor Signal IC1 P16 2 Stacked Paper Detecting Signal 9 5V 1 DC 5V 10 GND Belt Home Position Sensor 3 Ground 11 Belt Home Position Sensor Signal IC1 P43 2 Tractor Belt Home Position Detecting Signal 12 5V 1 DC 5V 13 GND Sheet Detecting Sensor 3 Ground 14 Sheet Detecting Sensor Signal IC1 P42 2 Stapled Paper Detecting Signal 15 5V DC 5V No Signal Name Connection Input Output Function 0V No...

Page 710: ...ND Elevation Celing Sensor 3 Ground 5 Elevation Celing Sensor Signal IC1 P17 2 Lower Tray Celing Detecting Signal 6 5V 1 DC 5V 7 GND Elevation Bottom Sensor 3 Ground 8 Elevation Bottom Sensor Signal IC1 P03 2 Lower Tray Bottom Detecting Signal 9 5V 1 DC 5V 10 GND Punch Box Detecting Sensor 3 Ground 11 Punch Box Detecting Sensor Signal IC1 P43 2 Punch Dust Box Detecting Signal 12 5V 1 DC 5V 0V Home...

Page 711: ...d by Finisher 2 SOTRX IC13 1Y 12 Signal Received by Finisher 3 GND 10 Ground 4 ISOTTX IC13 1B 8 Inverse Signal Transmitted to Finisher 5 SOTTX IC13 1A 9 Inverse Signal Transmitted to Finisher No Signal Name Connection Input Output Function 1 Set Switch Set Switch 1 DC 24V 2 Set Switch 3 Finisher Set Detection Signal No Signal Name Connection Input Output Function Pulse 0V Pulse 24V Set 0V 24V ...

Page 712: ...ive 8 CPU PCB connector CN15 is shorted or loose 9 CPU PCB is defective oF Finisher Tray Capacity Copies exceeded the maximum capacity of the finisher tray Remove the copies from the finisher s tray and press the Start key Face Down only Code Contents J60 When the finisher is installed a The finisher entry paper feed sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the copier paper e...

Page 713: ...ion sensor Belt in home position c 2 bin finisher jogging home position sensor Jogging in home position d 2 bin finisher set switch 2 bin finisher is pulled out C17 a 2 bin finisher stapler cartridge detecting sensor Cartridge is installed b 2 bin finisher staple detecting sensor Staple is detected c 2 bin finisher stapler home position sensor Stapler in home position d 2 bin finisher sheet detect...

Page 714: ... to the home position c110 Finisher bin movement 2 The bin moves downward then moves up to the home position c111 Finisher paper transport motor Paper transport motor rotates c113 Finisher tamper drive motor Tamper drive motor rotates c114 Finisher staple motor The stapler operates one time then resets c116 Finisher belt motor Belt motor rotates once c117 Finisher gate change solenoid The solenoid...

Page 715: ... saddle stitching 2 Three Different Auto Stapling Positions Three different stapling positions Front 1 point stapling Rear 1 point stapling and Middle 2 point stapling are supported 3 Saddle Stitching A maximum of ten sheets of paper can be delivered stapled and folded in the middle 4 Punch Mechanism Option Installation of a Punch Unit enables punching holes in sheets before delivery 64 to 133 g m...

Page 716: ...e 30 sets or 500 sheets Small size 30 sets or 1000 sheets Folded stack Stack of 6 to 10 sheets 10 sets Stack of 1 to 5 sheets 20 sheets Mixed Stack Size mix 500 sheets Note 3 Staple mix 30 sheets same paper configuration Paper Detection Delivery tray Yes Bind tray Yes Control Panel No Display No Size W x D x H 26 18 x 24 21 x 21 85 in 665 x 615 x 555 mm excl installing kit Weight 59 40 lb 27 kg Po...

Page 717: ...t Stapling A3 A4 R B4 LDR LGL LTR R Rear 1 Point stapling A3 A4 A4 R B4 B5 LDR LGL LTR LTR R Middle 2 Point Stapling A3 A4 A4 R B4 B5 LDR LGL LTR LTR R Middle 2 Point Stapling A3 A4 R B4 LDR LTR R With the saddle in use Manual Stapling None Folding Method Roller contact Folding Mode Double folding single sheet non stapling available Folding Position Center of sheet Requires a margin of 0 2 in 5 mm...

Page 718: ...DR or LTR 2 92 0 16 in 74 2 4 mm 7 65 0 16 in 194 2 4 mm 0 2 0 08 in 5 2 mm LGL or LTR R 8 5 FLS 1 67 0 16 in 42 5 4 mm 6 4 0 16 in 162 5 4 mm 0 2 0 08 in 5 2 mm B4 or B5 2 48 0 16 in 63 4 mm 7 2 0 16 in 183 4 mm A3 3 27 0 16 in 83 4 mm 1 5 mm 1 210 2 0 mm 2 148 5 2 0 mm 2 7 99 0 16 in 203 4 mm A4 R 1 56 0 16 in 39 5 4 mm 6 28 6 16 in 159 5 4 mm LDR 2 92 0 16 in 74 2 4 mm 7 65 0 16 in 194 2 4 mm L...

Page 719: ...ch Unit DA SP41 PB 0 26 in 6 5 mm For EU and Other Destinations Punch Waste 2 3 hole Punch Unit DA SP41 PU 2 hole 1500 sheets 3 hole 1500 sheets For USA and Canada 4 hole Punch Unit DA SP41 PB 1500 sheets For EU and Other Destinations Size W x D x H 3 54 x 22 05 x 6 69 in 90 x 560 x 170 mm Weight 5 5 lb 2 5 kg approx Power Supply 24 VDC 5 VDC supplied by the Finisher Unit Maximum Power Consumption...

Page 720: ...2 0 12 in 28 5 3 mm A3 A4 1 24 0 12 in 31 5 3 mm LDR LTR 2 87 0 12 in 73 3 mm LGL LTR R 1 1 1 1 3 15 0 04 in 80 1 mm 0 47 0 12 in 12 3 mm 2 76 0 04 in 70 1 mm 0 47 0 12 in 12 3 mm 4 25 0 04 in 108 1 mm 4 25 0 04 in 108 1 mm 0 47 0 12 in 12 3 mm 3 15 0 04 in 80 1 mm 0 47 0 12 in 12 3 mm 3 15 0 04 in 80 1 mm 3 15 0 04 in 80 1 mm 1 2 Holes Puncher Unit J1 2 2 3 Holes Puncher Unit K1 3 4 Holes Puncher...

Page 721: ...es of Parts 11 3 1 3 1 Cross Section 1 Finisher Unit Fig 1 004 1 Delivery Tray 2 Aligning Plate Front Rear 3 Paddle 4 Delivery Roller 5 Processing Tray Stopper 6 Feed Roller 7 Punch Unit Option 8 Delivery Belt 9 Stack Delivery Roller 10 Stapler 11 Saddle Unit 1 2 3 8 9 10 11 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 722: ...3 1 Bind Stopper 2 Bind Tray 3 Stack Feed Roller 4 Bind Delivery Roller 5 Paper Fold Roller 6 Paper Pushing Plate 1 Die 2 Cam 3 Hole Puncher Punch Blade 4 Punch Waste Case No Item Timing 1 Staple Cartridge Replacement When prompted indicator on host machine control panel 2 Punch Waste Removal Optional When prompted indicator on host machine control panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 723: ... by the Host Machine in addition to the commands from the Finisher Controller PCB The Punch Unit option is designed for installation to the Pickup Assembly of the Finisher and is used to punch holes in sheets coming from the Host Machine The above operations are controlled with various commands from the Finisher Controller PCB as well as the commands from the Punch Controller PCB Fig 2 001 Caution...

Page 724: ...f various sensors and switches to the Host Machine by way of the serial communication line The ICs mounted to the Finisher Controller PCB have the following functions IC13 CPU Controls sequence of operations IC12 EEP ROM Backs up adjustment settings IC6 EP ROM Stores sequence programs IC11 communication IC Communicates with the host machine IC1 regulator IC Generates 5 V Fig 2 001 shows the flow o...

Page 725: ...5V PDL_HP CN9 1 3 2 PI4 CN23 3 1 2 5V F JOG_HP CN4 3 2 PI5 CN36 3 1 2 5V R JOG_HP CN5 13 15 14 Inlet Sensor Finisher Controller PCB When the sensor detects paper 1 When the paddle is at home position 1 When the swing guide is at home position 1 When the aligning plate Front is at home position 1 When the aligning plate Rear is at home position 1 When the sensor detects paper 1 When the delivery be...

Page 726: ...sor Bind Tray Sensor Staple Fold Motor Clock Sensor Shift Upper Limit Sensor Shift Lower Limit Sensor Shift Motor Clock Sensor Front Door Sensor Upper Cover Sensor Full Stack Sensor Joint Switch Front Door Switch Stapler Safety Switch Finisher Controller PCB When at folding home position 0 When the stack feed roller Upper is at home position 1 When the sensor detects paper 1 When the tray is at th...

Page 727: ...tween 1 and 0 according to the direction of motor rotation Switches between 1 and 0 according to the direction of motor rotation Switches between 1 and 0 according to the direction of motor rotation CN72 CN56 2 5 CN10 1 2 3 3 1 4 4 5 6 6 24V FEEDMTR_A FEEDMTR_ A FEEDMTR_B FEEDMTR_ B M2 6 5 1 2 CN10 7 8 4 3 9 3 4 10 2 5 11 1 6 12 24V PDLMTR_A PDLMTR_ A PDLMTR_B PDLMTR_ B CN57 M1 6 5 1 2 CN13 1 2 4 ...

Page 728: ...er PCB 2 2 Fig 2 006 2 1 2 1 SIFTMTR_1 SIFTMTR_0 Shift Motor Finisher Controller PCB Switches between and according to the direction of motor rotation CN70 2 1 2 1 CN6 1 2 CN70 M6 2 1 2 1 BINDMTR_1 BINDMTR_0 Staple Fold Motor Switches between and according to the direction of motor rotation CN71 CN6 3 4 M7 ...

Page 729: ...aples 0 When the staple is at top the stapler 0 When the stapler is connected 0 Switches between 1 and 0 according to the direction of motor rotation Communication line PI19 CN72 4 CN72A 4 CN72A 4 STPL_HP CN11 4 5V 5V PI20 CN72 3 CN72A 3 CN72A 3 HOOK_S CN11 5 5V PI21 CN72 2 CN72A 2 CN72A 2 SELF_P STPL_CNCT SLIDMTR_A SLIDMTR_ A SLIDMTR_B SLIDMTR_ B GND CN11 6 5V CN72 1 CN72A 1 CN72A 1 CN11 7 CN72 6...

Page 730: ...STLED DUSTPTR SREG1 SREG2 SREG3 SREG4 PAEND J1006 7 9 8 J1005 1 2 J1005 3 4 J1007 12 11 10 9 8 7 13 Punch Home Position Sensor Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor Punch Motor Clock Sensor LED121 Waste full LED PCB PT131 Waste Full Photosensor PCB Photosensor PCB PT1 PT2 PT3 PT4 PT5 Punch Controller PCB When the hole puncher is at home position 0 When the punch slide unit is at home positi...

Page 731: ...EDON4 LEDON3 LEDON2 LEDON1 A B A B J1007 6 1 5 4 3 2 Punch Motor Horizontal Registration Motor LED5 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 LED PCB Punch Controller PCB When 1 LED goes ON Switches between and according to the direction of motor rotation Switches the pulse signals according to the rotation of the motor M1P J1002 1 2 M2P J1001 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 732: ...unch Unit option is installed the sheets are punched and delivered to the Delivery Tray Sheets may be delivered in either of five ways including one for the Punch Unit Fig 2 010 1 Normal Delivery a Simple Stacking The Machine pulls in the sheet once to the processing tray and then delivers it to the Delivery Tray Fig 2 011 Delivery method Normal delivery Punching Simple stacking Job offset Staplin...

Page 733: ...he form of an aligning plane When the number of sheets stacked on the Processing Tray reaches a specified value the sheets are delivered in a form of a stack Even if the specified value is not reached stacked sheets are temporarily delivered when 10 sheets of large size paper 300 mm or longer or 30 sheets of small size paper 299 mm or shorter have been stacked 5 and STMT sizes 10 sheets Fig 2 012 ...

Page 734: ... sheets stacked on the Processing Tray reaches a specified value the Finisher staples them and delivers the stapled stack to the Delivery Tray Fig 2 013 d Saddle Delivery The Machine deposits a stack of sheets on the Processing Tray staples it middle 2 point and then moves it to the Saddle Unit The Saddle Unit folds the stack in two and delivers it to the Bind Tray Fig 2 014 ...

Page 735: ...r CPU on the Finisher Controller PCB The paper path is equipped with the sensors shown in Table 2 002 used to monitor the arrival or passage of sheets If a sheet fails to arrive at or move past a specific sensor within a specific period of time the Finisher Controller will assume a jam and stops the ongoing operation and at the same time communicates the presence of a jam to the Host Machine Table...

Page 736: ...al FJOGMTR Shift Motor Drive Signal SIFTMTR Delivery Motor Drive Signal EJCTMTR Slide Motor Drive Signal SLIDMTR Staple Fold Motor Drive Signal BINDMTR Staple Fold Motor Clock Detect Signal BIND_CLK Alignment Plate Motor rear drive signal RJOGMTR Bind Clutch Drive Signal B_CLU Feed Motor Drive Signal FEEDMTR Paddle Motor Drive Signal PDLMTR M4 M5 M2 M1 CL M7 M3 M6 M8 PI14 ...

Page 737: ...2 016 Table 2 002 Notation Name Description Connector on Finisher Controller PCB PI1 Inlet Sensor Photo Interrupter CN16 PI10 Fold Position Sensor Photo Interrupter CN16 Finisher Controller PCB Inlet paper detect signal ENT_P Fold position paper detect signal BIND_P PI1 PI10 ...

Page 738: ...er on the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Aligning Plate Front Motor M4 and the Aligning Plate Rear Motor M5 to return the two aligning plates to their home positions Table 2 003 Fig 2 017 Sensor Symbol Connector Function Motor Symbol Aligning Plate Front Home Position Sensor PI4 CN4 3 Drives the Aligning Plate Front Aligning Plate Front Motor M4 Aligning Plate Rear Home Position Sensor PI5 CN5...

Page 739: ...t Operation Each sheet is pulled forward or backward using the Aligning Plate Front and the Aligning Plate Rear The offset operation is performed each time a sheet is pulled onto the Processing Tray Fig 2 019 Offsetting in the forward direction Fig 2 020 Offsetting in the backward direction Paper Aligning Plate Paddle Stack Delivery Roller Upper Swing Guide Processing Tray Stopper Stack Delivery R...

Page 740: ... Delivery Motor is driven a specified number of pulses causing the Swing Guide to ascend Next the Paper Delivery Motor is driven Next the Delivery Motor is driven to deliver the paper stack with the nails of the Delivery Belt that rotates in sync with the Stack Delivery Rollers Fig 2 021 Job offset sequence Fig 2 022 Swing Guide Inlet Sensor PI1 Start signal 360msec 360msec 60msec 30msec 220msec C...

Page 741: ...ven a specified number of pulses The Stapler Unit moves to rear standby position at the back of the Machine entering the standby state Table 2 004 Fig 2 023 Sensor Symbol Connector Function Remarks Slide Home Position Sensor PI18 CN11 3 Detects the home position for the stapler moving back and forth Staple Home Position Sensor PI19 CN11 4 Detects the home position for the stapling operation In the...

Page 742: ...nisher Controller PCB moves the stapler for stapling according to the specified stapling position when rear 1 point stapling is specified the stapler does not move but it staples at the standby position As a stapler moves forward the Processing Tray Stopper is folded forward Fig 2 024 Fig 2 025 Paper Stack Swing Guide Delivery Tray Stack Delivery Roller Upper Processing Tray Stopper Stapler Stack ...

Page 743: ...a specified number of pulses causing the Swing Guide to ascend At the same time the Slide Motor is driven to return the stapler back to the standby position followed by driving of the Delivery Motor Then the paper stack is delivered with the nails of the Delivery Belt that rotates in sync with the Stack Delivery Rollers Fig 2 026 Fig 2 027 Paper Stack Swing Guide Delivery Belt Stack Delivery Rolle...

Page 744: ... direction until the sensor turns ON allowing the Staple Cam to the original position The Staple Empty Sensor PI20 is used to detect presence absence of a staple cartridge in the Machine and presence absence of staples in the Cartridge The Staple Top Position Sensor PI21 is used to determine whether staples are pushed up to the top of the Staple Cartridge The Finisher Controller circuit does not d...

Page 745: ...apling position in response to the stapling command from the Host Machine Fig 2 030 shows the standby position of the Stapler and the stapling position depending on the staple mode a Front 1 Point Stapling The Stapler waits at the back The Stapler moves to and returns from the stapling position for each stapling operation Fig 2 030 b Rear 1 Point Stapling The Stapler waits at the back The stapling...

Page 746: ...es it at the front stapling position Fig 2 032 d Middle 2 Point Stapling Bind Mode The Stapler waits at the back The stapler moves to and returns from the stapling position for each stapling operation The stapler first staples a paper stack at the rear stapling position and then staples it at the front stapling position Fig 2 033 Feed direction Standby position Stapling position Stapling position ...

Page 747: ...ne Delivery Signal 10msec 360msec 360msec Staple Inlet Sensor PI1 Processing Tray Sensor PI6 Feed Motor M1 Delivery Motor M3 Delivery Belt Home Position Sensor PI7 Paddle Home Position Sensor PI2 Swing Guide Home Position Sensor PI3 Stapler Safety Switch MS3 Alignment Motor front M4 Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor front PI4 Staple Home Position Sensor PI9 Staple Fold Motor M7 Paddle Motor M2 ...

Page 748: ...roller PCB drives the Shift Motor M6 to return the Delivery Tray to the home position When the paper coming from the Processing Tray is stacked on the Delivery Tray the Shift Motor is driven a specified number of pulses causing the Delivery Tray to descend Clock pulses are detected by the Shift Motor Clock Sensor PI17 Then the Delivery Tray returns to the home position for the next stacking operat...

Page 749: ...r PCB The Finisher Controller PCB is controlled by the commands from the Host Machine 11 3 2 5 2 Feed Drive System 1 Outline This machine stitches the paper stack coming from the Finisher folds it and delivers it to the Bind Tray in the Saddle Unit in response to the commands from the Host Machine That is the machine performans the following operations 1 Paper Feed in 2 Stitching 3 Stack Feed 4 Fo...

Page 750: ...the stack is fed toward the Saddle Unit Fig 2 037 b Stitching When the center of the paper stack stitching position reaches the stapler s staple position the Stapler stitches the paper stack When only one sheet is fed from the Host Machine the next step stack feed is performed without performing the stitching operation Fig 2 038 Stack Delivery Roller Upper Paper Stack Stack Delivery Roller Lower S...

Page 751: ...h the Paper Pushing Plate and Paper Folding Roller s nip part Fig 2 039 d Folding Delivery The Paper Pushing Plate pushes in the center of the paper stack to feed it toward the Paper Fold Rollers Then the Paper Fold Rollers and Bind Delivery Rollers deliver the paper stack to the Bind Tray Fig 2 040 Stack Feed Roller Upper Paper Pushing Plate Paper Fold Roller Stack Feed Roller Lower Paper Fold Ro...

Page 752: ...per stack is sandwiched between the Upper and Lower Stack Delivery Rollers The Delivery Motor M3 rotates in the reverse direction feeding the paper stack toward the Saddle Unit When the leading edge of the paper stack reaches the Folding Position Sensor PI10 the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Delivery Motor a specified number of motor pulses to stop the center of the paper stack stitching posi...

Page 753: ...he Stack Feed Roller upper to descend The paper stack is sandwiched between the Stack Feed Rollers Then the Bind Clutch CL1 is turned ON to rotate the Feed Motor M2 in the forward direction thus feeding the paper stack to the folding position The feed amount is equivalent to the number of pulses used to drive the Feed Motor M2 unit the paper stack reaches the folding position Fig 2 042 Feed Amount...

Page 754: ...stack however it is not used to detect a jam 2 Paper Folding Paper is folded using paper fold rollers and a paper pushing plate Almost concurrently with the start of roller rotation the Paper Pushing Plate starts operating to push the paper stack into the gap between the Paper Fold Rollers When the paper stack is fed about 10 mm with the rotation of the Paper Fold Rollers the Paper Pushing Plate r...

Page 755: ...Fig 2 044 Paper Folding Start Position Fig 2 045 Folding Home Position Sensor PI11 Paper Pushing Plate Paper Fold Roller Upper Staple Fold Motor M7 Paper Fold Roller Lower Paper stack Paper Stack Paper Push Plate Folds feeds a paper stack Inlet Outlet Feeds a paper stack ...

Page 756: ...dle Motor M1 Paddle Home Position Sensor PI2 Swing Guide Home Position Sensor PI3 Stapler Safety Switch MS3 Slide Motor M8 Staple Fold Motor M7 Staple Home Position Sensor PI19 Folding Position Sensor PI10 Stack Feed Roller Upper Home Position Sensor PI12 Binding Clutch CL1 Bind Tray Sensor PI13 Folding Home Position Sensor PI11 50msec 13571msec ...

Page 757: ...the Host Machine move through the Punch Unit and then the feed system of the Finisher When the trailing edge of a sheet from the Host Machine reaches the Punch Unit the sheet is stopped once and the Punch Shaft is rotated to punch a hole along the trailing edge These operations are controlled with various commands from the Finisher Controller PCB as well as the commands from the Punch Controller P...

Page 758: ...uted by rotating punch shaft 180 from its home position As many as five light receiving transistors Photo Sensor PCB are mounted over the inlet paper path of the Punch Unit on the other hand as many as five LEDs LED PCB are mounted under the path together serving as five Sensors The Frontmost Sensor LED5 PT5 is used to detect the training edge of sheets and the remaining four LED1 through LED4 PT1...

Page 759: ...ntal Registration Detection Signal LED1 4 PT1 4 SREG1 4 Horizontal Registration Motor M2P Drive Signal Punch Motor M1P Drive Signal Punch Motor Clock PI3P Detection Signal PUNCHCLK Waste Full Detection Signal LED121 PT131 DFULL Horizontal Registration Home Position PI2P Detection Signal SREGHP Punch Home Position PI1P Detection Signal PUNCHHP PT1 2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5 LED1 PT131 LED121 ...

Page 760: ... position is identified when the Punch Home Position is ON The punching operation for the first sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated 180 and the Punch Home Position Sensor goes ON the punching operation for the second sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated 180 in reverse and the Punch Home Position Sensor goes ON The punching operation takes place as follows when making a hole in two s...

Page 761: ...up the Hole Puncher on the other half circumference of the Punch Shaft The punching operation takes place as follows when making two holes in two sheets of paper 1 A hole is made along the trailing edge of the 1st sheet Fig 2 051 While two holes are being made the 3 Hole Puncher makes a single round trip in escape direction Fig 2 052 2 Holes are made along the trailing edge of the 2nd sheet Fig 2 ...

Page 762: ... Edge Sensor LED5 PT5 and the Horizontal Registration Sensors LED1 through 4 SREG1 through 4 and causes a move to a specific position matching the trailing edge of each sheet in relation to the size of the sheet The horizontal registration operation takes place as follows 1 When the leading edge of a sheet from the Host Machine is detected by the Trailing Edge Sensor LED5 PT5 the Horizontal Regist...

Page 763: ...the Horizontal Registration Motor M2P is rotated in reverse to return the Punch Slide Unit to its home position 5 For each sheet that arrives in succession the Punch Slide Unit is returned to its home position and is caused to repeat steps 1 through 4 Fig 2 058 Horizontal Registration Sensor LED1 PT1 used to detect the edge of sheets of A3 A4 LTR 279x432 11 x17 Horizontal Registration Sensor 2 LED...

Page 764: ...hine Fig 2 059 1 Inlet Sensor Delay Jam 1011 If the Inlet Sensor does not detect the paper 3 times the specified period of time after the paper out signal was sent from the hooked up machine Fig 2 060 2 Inlet Sensor Stationary Jam 1021 If the paper does not pass the Inlet Sensor 3 times the specified period of time after the Inlet Sensor detected the paper s front edge Fig 2 061 PI1 PI10 PI1 Inlet...

Page 765: ...sconnected from its host machine or the Front Door or the Upper Cover is opened while the system is in operation paper on the move 6 Staple Jam 1006 The Staple Home Position Sensor PI19 does not go OFF 600 msec after the Stapler is driven Or it does not return to its home position where the sensor goes ON 7 Punch Jam Paper stuck at punch stapler Punching not ended 1 second after the punching reque...

Page 766: ...sm A circuit breaker CB1 is monitored to protect the 24 VDC system sued to drive the motors against overcurrent The 24 V system used to drive the Feed Motor M1 paddle motor M2 and delivery motor M3 is equipped with a fuse that melts in the presence of overcurrent 11 3 2 8 2 Punch Unit Option 1 Outline When the Host Machine is turned on the Punch Unit is supplied by the Finisher Controller PCB with...

Page 767: ...ower supply system Fig 2 065 2 Protective Mechanisms The 24 V system used to drive the Punch Motor M1P and the Horizontal Registration Motor M2P is equipped with a built in fuse that melts in the presence of overcurrent Finisher Controller PCB 24V 24V 5V 5V Punch Controller PCB Motors Sensors Logic System 5V ...

Page 768: ... Door 5 Upper Door 6 Upper Right Cover Assembly 4 7 Jam Removal Cover The number in parentheses indicates the number of Mounting Screws used Fig 3 002 1 1 Removing the Delivery Tray 1 Remove the four Screws 1 and detach the Delivery Tray 2 Fig 3 003 1 2 Removing the Front Cover 1 Open the Front Door 1 2 While picking the Claw 2 detach the Fold Jam Releasing Dial 3 3 Remove 2 Screws 4 1 5 6 2 7 3 4...

Page 769: ...4530 6010 6020 6030 Fig 3 004 4 Remove 3 Screws 5 and detach the Front Cover 6 Fig 3 005 1 3 Removing the Rear Cover 1 Remove 2 Screws 1 on the pickup side and remove 1 Screw 2 on the delivery side then detach the Rear Cover 3 Fig 3 006 6 5 5 3 1 3 2 ...

Page 770: ...30 Fig 3 007 1 4 Removing the Upper Cover 1 Open the Upper Cover 1 and turn the Cover Band Retainer 2 to the left to remove it 2 Remove the Cover Band 3 Fig 3 008 3 Remove 1 Screw 4 and detach the Processing Tray Rear Cover 5 then detach the Upper Cover 6 3 2 1 6 5 4 ...

Page 771: ... Tray Upper Cover 1 Remove the Front Cover See 1 2 2 Remove the Rear Cover See 1 3 3 Remove the Upper Cover See 1 4 4 Disconnect the Connector 1 and remove the Screw 2 Fig 3 010 5 While lifting the Processing Tray Upper Cover 3 disconnect the Connector 4 then detach the Processing Tray Upper Cover 3 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 772: ...r Right Cover Assembly 3 Fig 3 013 1 7 Removing the Saddle Guide 1 Remove the Delivery Tray See 1 2 Remove the Front Cover See 2 3 Remove the Rear Cover See 3 4 Free the Delivery Tray Support Plate front 1 and the Delivery Tray Support Plate rear 2 to the outside from the rail grooves 5 Remove 4 Screws 3 Fig 3 014 6 Shift the Side Guide 4 lightly to the front and free the engagement of the Paper s...

Page 773: ...ion Be sure to mount the Side Guide after securely fitting the Paper Surface Detecting Lever rear 5 in the groove of the Paper Surface Detecting Lever middle 6 After mounting push the Paper Surface Detecting Lever several times to make sure that Side Guide is mounted securely 5 5 6 6 ...

Page 774: ...er Lower Unit of the Stapler 4 shoots staples will shift from the position where the Staple Clincher Upper Unit of the Stapler 5 receives Staples Fig 3 18 2 2 Adjusting the Stapler Phase When the Gears or Timing Belt at the front of the Stapler is replaced or removed for some reason the staple shooting timing of the Staple Driver Lower Unit of the Stapler does not match the staple bending timing o...

Page 775: ...Clincher 4 Fig 3 020 3 Remove 2 E Rings 6 to remove the Staple Jam Releasing Gear 7 Timing Belt 8 and Relay Gear 1 9 Remove the Spacer and Spring at the back of the Staple Jam Releasing Gear 4 Remove 1 Screw 10 and Spring 11 to remove the Belt Tentioner 12 Fig 3 021 5 Remove the Timing Belt 13 6 Remove 1 E Ring 14 to remove the Staple Position Check Gear 15 4 1 2 5 3 7 6 11 8 9 10 12 14 13 15 ...

Page 776: ... Staple Driver Gear with the Round Hole 17 at the back Fig 3 023 8 Insert a Pin 18 with a diameter of approximately 2 mm use of a 2 mm Allen wrench is recommended in the Round Hole to secure the Gear Fig 3 024 9 Turn the Gear 19 to align the Round Hole in the Staple Clincher Cam with the Round Hole 20 at the back 16 17 18 19 20 ...

Page 777: ...e 26 in the frame Caution The position where the Blue Mark is aligned with the Round Hole is the home position for stapling If the Staple Jam Cancel Dial is turned for some reason the home position deviates making it impossible to remove the Stapler Cartridge If such a case the Gear can be returned to the home position by checking Blue Mark position Therefore it is necessary to mount the Gear at t...

Page 778: ...rs and Saddle Cam positioned as shown in Fig 3 029 mount Gears as shown in Fig 3 030 Align the mark either of two marks on the saddle cam drive gear 3 with the mark on the relay gear 4 on the half of the periphery where gears with a smaller face width are arranged With the mark on the Saddle Cam Drive Gear 3 aligned with the mark on the Relay Gear 4 align the other mark on the relay gear with the ...

Page 779: ...top Ring 6 and detach the Timing Belt 7 6 Disconnect 2 Connectors 8 Fig 3 034 7 Remove 3 Screws 9 and slide out the Stapler Unit 10 slightly to the front 8 Slide out the Saddle Unit 11 to the front Fig 3 035 2 5 Removing the Processing Tray Assembly 1 Remove the processing Tray Upper Cover See 1 5 2 Remove the Side Guide See 1 7 3 Remove 2 Screws 1 and disconnect 5 Connectors 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 10 9...

Page 780: ... 3 036 4 Pull the processing Stopper Base 3 to the front and free the Claw 5 at the front and the Claw 6 at the rear of the Processing Stopper 4 Fig 3 037 5 Disconnect 3 Connectors 7 6 Release 2 Claws 8 of the harness retainer and detach the Motor Harness 9 3 6 4 4 5 9 8 7 ...

Page 781: ... 7 Remove the Stop Ring 10 the flange 15 and detach the Timing Belt 11 8 Disconnect the Connector 12 and free the Harness 14 from the Edge Saddle 13 Fig 3 039 9 Remove 2 Screws 15 and slide the Processing Tray Assembly 16 to the rear then lift it to detach 12 14 13 10 15 11 16 15 ...

Page 782: ...Remove the Processing Tray Assembly See 2 3 2 Place the Processing Tray Assembly 1 as shown Caution Be sure to take care not to damage the Aligning Plate 2 Fig 3 041 3 Detach the Timing Belt 3 and remove 2 Screws 4 Fig 3 042 4 Separate the Processing Tray Assembly 5 and the Paddle Assembly 6 as shown 1 2 4 4 3 6 5 ...

Page 783: ...ainer 4 3 Free the six Harness Retainers 5 and disconnect the Connector 6 4 Free the Harness 7 from the Harness Retainer 5 5 Free the Harness 7 from the Edge Saddle 8 then disconnect the two Connectors 9 Fig 3 045 6 Release the Harness Retainer 10 and disconnect the Connector 11 7 Free the Harness 12 from the Harness Retainer 10 8 Free the Harness 12 for the Edge Saddle 13 and disconnect the two C...

Page 784: ...030 Fig 3 046 9 Remove 1 Screw 15 and free the Claw 17 of the Harness Guide from the Long Angle 16 of the Base Plate Fig 3 047 10 Disconnect 2 Connectors 18 and free the Harness 20 from the Edge Saddle 19 Fig 3 048 11 Remove 3 Screws 21 15 16 17 18 20 18 19 21 21 21 ...

Page 785: ...taple Fold Drive Unit 23 Fig 3 050 2 8 Removing the Feed Motor Unit 1 Remove the Rear Cover See 1 3 2 Release the Harness Retainer 5 and disconnect the Connector 6 3 Disconnect the Connector 7 4 Remove 1 Screw 1 and detach the Harness Guide 2 5 Remove 3 Screws 3 and detach the Feed Motor Unit 4 22 23 3 3 1 2 4 7 6 5 ...

Page 786: ...030 Fig 3 051 2 9 Removing the Feed Roller 1 Remove the Upper Cover See 1 4 2 Remove the Upper Right Cover Assembly See 1 6 3 Remove the Feed Motor Unit See 2 6 4 Remove 1 Screw 1 5 Remove the Stop Ring 2 and detach the Bushing 3 Fig 3 052 6 Remove 3 Screws 4 1 3 2 4 ...

Page 787: ... the Claw 8 Remove the Stop Ring 7 and detach the Bushing 8 9 Remove 1 Screws 9 and detach the Inlet Sensor 10 10 Remove the Lower Paper Guide 11 Fig 3 054 11 Remove the Feed Roller 12 Fig 3 055 2 10 Removing the Stack Delivery Roller upper 1 Remove the Paddle Assembly See 2 4 2 Place the Paddle Assembly 1 as shown 5 9 10 11 7 6 8 12 1 ...

Page 788: ...elivery Roller Assembly upper 3 Fig 3 057 4 Push up the Stack Delivery Roller upper 4 from below to free the Stack Deliver Roller upper 4 from the Shaft 5 Fig 3 058 5 Shift up the Stack Delivery Roller upper 4 and then push it down to detach the Stack Deliver Roller upper 4 6 Likewise remove the Stack Delivery Roller upper 6 at the front 3 2 4 5 6 4 ...

Page 789: ... 1 Remove the Paddle Assembly See 2 4 2 Place the Paddle Assembly 1 as shown Fig 3 060 3 Turn the Gear 2 in the direction of the arrow to move up the Stack Delivery Roller Assembly upper 3 Fig 3 061 4 Push up the Safety Guide 4 from below to free one side of the Safety Guide 4 from the Shaft 5 1 3 2 5 4 ...

Page 790: ...rection of the arrow 7 Likewise remove the other Paddle Fig 3 064 2 12 Removing the Stack Delivery Roller lower Delivery Belt 1 Remove the Paddle Assembly and separate it from the Processing Tray Assembly See 2 4 2 Slide the Aligning Plate front 2 and the Aligning Plate rear 3 of the Processing Tray Assembly 1 by sliding them to the outside Fig 3 065 3 Remove the Processing Tray Stopper 4 4 5 1 1 ...

Page 791: ...de front 7 while freeing 2 Claws 6 Fig 3 067 5 Remove 1 Screw 8 then while freeing the Claw 9 detach the Paper Guide rear 10 Fig 3 068 6 Remove 2 Stop Rings 11 then move 2 Bushings 12 to the inside Fig 3 069 7 Remove 4 Screws 13 then lift the Stack Delivery Roller Assembly lower 14 to detach 5 7 6 8 10 9 12 12 11 11 13 14 13 ...

Page 792: ...s are flush Fig 3 072 3 1 Removing the Finisher Controller PCB 1 Remove the Rear Cover See 1 3 2 Disconnect 17 Connectors 1 and remove 1 Screw 2 3 Free the PCB Retainer 3 and detach the Finisher Controller PCB 4 Fig 3 073 3 2 Removing the Slide Home Position PCB 1 Open the Front Door 1 and turn the Tab 2 on the stapler slide in the direction of the arrow to slide the Stapler to the frontmost point...

Page 793: ...e in the direction of the arrow so that the Fixing Screw 7 of the Slide Home Position PCB 6 is in view through the round hole 6 Remove the Fixing Screw 7 Fig 3 076 7 Disconnect the Connector 8 8 Remove the Flexible Cable Retainer 9 9 Free the Lock 10 of the Connector in the direction of the arrow then detach the Flexible Cable 11 and then detach the Slide Home Position PCB 12 4 4 3 5 2 6 7 8 12 9 ...

Page 794: ...or 3 Fig 3 078 1 2 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor 1 Disconnect Connector J1001 1 2 Remove the Harness 3 from the Harness Guide 2 3 Remove 2 Screws 4 to remove the Horizontal Registration Motor 5 Fig 3 079 1 3 Removing the Punch Unit 1 Remove the Waste Case 2 Remove 1 Screw 1 to detach the Jam Processing Cover 2 Fig 3 080 3 Disconnect the Connector J1005 3 4 Remove the Harness 5 from th...

Page 795: ...0 4530 6010 6020 6030 Fig 3 081 5 Disconnect the Connector 6 6 Remove 1 Screw 7 and Sensor Support Plate 8 Fig 3 082 7 Remove 1 Screw 9 and Washer 10 8 Disconnect the Connector 11 9 Remove 2 Screws 12 to detach the Base Cover 13 6 8 7 9 10 13 11 12 ...

Page 796: ...ve the Upper Transmission Sensor Unit 15 and Lower Transmission Sensor 16 Fig 3 084 11 Remove the Punch Unit 18 from the Horizontal Registration Motor Assembly 17 Fig 3 085 2 1 Removing the Punch Controller PCB 1 Remove 2 Screws 1 2 Disconnect 5 Connectors 2 to remove the Punch Controller PCB 3 15 14 14 14 16 17 18 2 2 2 1 3 ...

Page 797: ...See 1 1 2 Remove 1 Screw 1 3 Remove the Harness 3 from the Harness Guide 2 on the PCB then detach the PCB Cover 4 Fig 3 087 4 Disconnect the Connector 5 to remove the Photosensor PCB 6 Fig 3 088 2 3 Removing the LED PCB 1 Remove the Waste Case 2 Disconnect Connector J1005 1 3 Remove the Harness 3 from the Harness Guide 2 1 3 2 4 6 5 1 3 2 ...

Page 798: ...4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 Fig 3 089 4 Remove the Screw 4 and Washer 5 5 Disconnect the Connector 6 6 Remove 1 Screw 7 to detach the Base Cover 8 Fig 3 090 7 Remove 1 Screw 9 8 Disconnect the Connector 10 to remove the LED PCB 11 4 5 8 6 7 9 10 11 ...

Page 799: ...or PCB 1 Remove the Punch Controller PCB See 2 1 2 Remove 2 Screws 1 to remove the PCB Film 2 Fig 3 092 3 Disconnect the Connector 3 to remove the Waste full Photosensor PCB 4 Fig 3 093 2 5 Removing the Waste Full LED PCB 1 Remove 1 Screw 1 2 Disconnect the Connector 2 to remove the Waste full LED PCB 3 2 1 3 4 2 1 3 ...

Page 800: ...Machine may require replacement once or more over the period of machine warranty because of deterioration or damage Replace them as needed 11 3 4 2 1 Saddle Finisher Unit Table 4 001 11 3 4 3 Scheduled Maintenance Table 4 002 No Part Name Part No Q ty Expected Life Remarks 1 Stapler 4G1 4268 000 1 300 000 operations A single cartridge is good for about 5 000 operations Item Interval Description Re...

Page 801: ...ne 1 Set SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB as follows Fig 5 001 2 Adjust the folding position by pressing the PSW1 or PSW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB a required number of times Pressing the switch once moves the folding position about 0 16mm To move the folding position in the direction press the PSW1 To move the folding position in the direction press the PSW2 Turn on Points 1 4 and 8 of SW1...

Page 802: ...ntroller PCB as follows Fig 5 003 2 Adjust the stapling position by pressing the PSW1 or PSW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB a required number of times Pressing the switch once moves the stapling position about 0 14mm To move the stapling position in the direction press the PSW1 To move the stapling position in the direction press the PSW2 Turn on Points 1 4 of SW1 on the circuit board first and t...

Page 803: ...d to the IC on the Punch Controller PCB for identification by the Finisher Be sure to register the type whenever you have replaced the Punch Controller PCB 1 Set bits 1 through 4 on the DIPSW1001 on the Punch Controller PCB as follows Fig 5 006 2 Press SW1002 on the Punch Controller PCB to select the appropriate number of punch holes Each press on SW1002 moves the selection through the following r...

Page 804: ...ost Machine 2 Set bits 1 through 4 on the Punch Controller PCB as follows Fig 5 007 3 Press SW1002 and SW1003 on the Punch Controller PCB at the same time The presses will initialize the EEP ROM At the end all LEDs LED1001 LED1002 LED1003 will go ON 4 Adjust the sensor output and store the number of punch holes ON 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 805: ...0 6020 6030 11 3 5 2 Arrangement of Electric Components 11 3 5 2 1 Finisher Saddle Unit 1 Sensors Microswitches and Clutch Fig 5 008 PI19 PI20 PI21 PI18 PI4 MS1 MS3 PI24 MS2 PI22 PI23 PI16 PI17 PI13 PI15 PI12 PI1 PI11 PI10 PI9 PI7 PI8 PI6 CL1 PI3 PI2 PI5 PI14 ...

Page 806: ... position detection PI11 Folding home position detection PI12 Folding roller home position detection PI13 Bind tray paper detection PI14 Stapler fold motor clock detection PI15 Shift upper limit detection PI16 Shift lower limit detection PI17 Shift motor clock detection PI18 Slide home position detection inside stapler PI19 Stapler drive home position detection inside stapler PI20 Staple detection...

Page 807: ...807 JAN 2006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 2 Motor PCBs Fig 5 009 M1 M2 M8 M5 M4 M3 M7 M6 1 ...

Page 808: ...30 6010 6020 6030 Table 5 003 Name Notation Description Motor M1 Paddle Motor M2 Feed Motor M3 Delivery Motor M4 Alignment Motor front M5 Alignment Motor rear M6 Shift Motor M7 Staple Fold Motor M8 Slide Motor Finisher Controller PCB 1 Finisher Control ...

Page 809: ...010 6020 6030 11 3 5 2 2 Punch Unit Option 1 Sensors Fig 5 010 Table 5 004 Name Notation Description Photo interrupters PI1P Puncher home position detection PI2P Horizontal registration home position detection PI3P Punch motor clock detection PI3P PI1P PI2P ...

Page 810: ...810 JAN 2006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 2 Motors Fig 5 011 Table 5 005 Name Notation Description Motor M1P Punch Motor M2P Horizontal Registration Motor M1 M2 ...

Page 811: ...2006 Ver 5 2 DP 3510 3520 3530 4510 4520 4530 6010 6020 6030 3 PCBs Fig 5 012 Table 5 006 Ref Name 1 Punch Controller PCB 2 Photosensor PCB 3 LED PCB 4 Waste Full Photosensor PCB 5 Waste Full LED PCB 1 4 2 3 5 ...

Page 812: ...d a high degree of accuracy 11 3 5 3 1 Finisher Controller PCB Fig 5 013 Table 5 007 Switch Description SW1 Folding position adjustment middle 2 point stapling adjustment etc PSW1 Folding position adjustment middle 2 point stapling adjustment etc PSW2 Folding position adjustment middle 2 point stapling adjustment etc PSW3 Factory mode 6 CN8 1 1 CN18 2 1 CN10 12 1 CN3 10 1 CN13 6 1 CN7 7 3 CN19 1 1...

Page 813: ...ch Description SW1001 Punch hole count registration sensor output adjustment etc SW1002 Punch hole count registration sensor output adjustment etc SW1003 Punch hole count registration sensor output adjustment etc 13 J1007 1 J1001 J1005 5 1 J1002 1 2 4 1 J1004 5 1 J1003 SW1001 SW1002 10 1 J1006 9 1 SW1003 LED1001 LED1002 LED1003 ...

Page 814: ...mal NO Correct the wring Feed Roller 3 Try turning the stack feed roller upper shaft by hand Does the stack feed roller upper move up down normally NO Correct the mechanical system Feed Motor M1 Finisher Controller PCB 4 Try replacing the feed motor Is the problem corrected YES End NO Replace the Finisher Controller PCB Delivery Belt Home Position Sensor PI7 1 Check the delivery belt home position...

Page 815: ...e the Finisher Controller PCB Wiring 1 Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Staple Fold Motor normal NO Correct the wring Stapler Unit 2 Try turning the staple jam releasing dial Is there mechanical trapping YES Correct the mechanical system Staple Fold Motor M7 Finisher Controller PCB 3 Try replacing the staple fold motor Is the problem corrected YES End NO Replace the Finish...

Page 816: ...front PI4 1 Check the aligning plate home position sensor front Is the sensor normal NO Replace the sensor Wiring 2 Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the front aligning plate motor front normal NO Correct the wring Aligning Plate front 3 Is there mechanical trapping in the aligning plate path YES Correct the mechanical system Alignment Motor front M4 Finisher Controller PCB 4 T...

Page 817: ... Guide Home Position Sensor PI3 2 Check the swing guide home position sensor Is the sensor normal NO Replace the sensor Wiring 3 Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the paddle motor normal NO Correct the wring Paddle Swing Guide Assembly 4 Try turning the paddle motor clockwise and counter clockwise by hands Is there mechanical tapping in the rotation of the paddle or the up down...

Page 818: ...Correct the wring Power Supply 3 Measure the voltage between CN14 5 and CN14 3 on the Finisher Controller PCB Is it 24VDC YES Replace the punch controller PCB NO Replace the Finisher Controller PCB Finisher Controller PCB Host Machine DC Controller PCB 1 Turn off and then off the host machine Is the problem corrected YES End Wiring 2 Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the punch ...

Page 819: ...h Mechanism Punch Motor M1P 4 Is there a fault in the punch mechanism YES Correct the punch mechanism NO Replace the punch motor Punch Controller PCB Finisher Controller PCB 5 Try replacing the punch controller PCB Is the problem corrected YES End NO Replace the Finisher Controller PCB Horizontal Registration Sensor Photo Sensor PCB LED PCB 1 Check the horizontal registration sensor Is the sensor ...

Page 820: ...orrected YES End NO Replace the Finisher Controller PCB Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor PI2P 1 Check the horizontal registration home position sensor Is the sensor normal NO Replace the sensor Wiring 2 Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the horizontal registration home position sensor normal NO Correct the wring Horizontal Registration Mechanism Horizontal Registrat...

Page 821: ...erent sizes are deposited in the compartment When a sheet of a different size is placed The sheet will be aligned based on maximum size width and delivered as a stack Overstacking for Stapling The number of sheets in the compartment has exceeded the limit imposed on stapling When an extra sheet is placed The sheets will be delivered with stapling Stack Tray Overstacking The number of sheets deposi...

Page 822: ...ch Waste Paper Full The amount of waste paper in the waste case has reached the limit During punching Normal operation will continue Remove the waste paper from the waste case Punch Waste Paper Excess Overflow The amount of waste paper in the waste case has exceeded the limit During punching Punching will be disabled Remove the waste paper from the water case ...

Page 823: ...nal EJCTMTR Eject Motor Drive Signal ENT_S Inlet Paper Detect Signal FDOOR_S Front Door Open Detect Signal FEEDMTR Feed Motor Drive Signal FJOG_HP Front Jog Plate HP Detect Signal FJOGMTR Front Jog Motor Drive Signal FRONT_SW Front Door Switch Signal HOOK_S Hook Empty Detect Signal JOINT_SW Joint Switch Signal LVL_S Paper Surface Detect Signal PAPER_F Paper Full Detect Signal PDL_HP Paddle HP Dete...

Page 824: ...t Signal PAEND Paper End Detect Signal PUNCH Punch HP Detect Signal SLIDE Side Registration HP Detect Signal SREG1 Side Registration Detect Signal 1 SREG2 Side Registration Detect Signal 2 SREG3 Side Registration Detect Signal 3 REG4 Side Registration Detect Signal 4 LEDON1 LED1 ON Signal LEDON2 LED2 ON Signal LEDON3 LED3 ON Signal LEDON4 LED4 ON Signal LEDON5 LED5 ON Signal ...

Page 825: ...P 9 CN16 10 DC 5V 10 CN16 11 SGND 11 CN16 12 ENT_S 12 DC 5V SGND CN15 1 CN15 2 CN15 3 BIND_EMPS 1 2 3 CN15 4 DC 5V 4 CN15 5 SGND 5 CN15 6 SIFT_CLK 6 CN15 7 DC 5V 7 CN15 8 SGND 8 CN15 9 SIFT_DNLMT 9 CN15 10 DC 5V 10 CN15 11 SGND 11 CN15 12 SIFT_UPLMT 12 DC 5V SGND CN9 1 CN9 2 CN9 3 PDL_HP 1 2 3 CN9 4 SGND 4 CN9 5 BIND_CLK 5 CN9 6 DC 5V 6 CN9 7 DC 5V 7 CN9 8 SGND 8 DC 5V SGND CN19 1 CN19 2 SGND CN17...

Page 826: ...M 2 1 M 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 1 J2010 J1007 6 J1007 5 J1007 4 J1007 3 J1007 2 J1007 1 J2010 J2010 1 J2010 2 J2010 3 J2010 4 J2010 5 J2010 6 J2011 7 J2011 6 J2011 5 J2011 4 J2011 3 J2011 2 J2011 1 7 7 J1007 7 2 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 1 J2011 J1007 13 J1007 12 J1007 11 J1007 10 J1007 9 J1007 8 J2011 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1007 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1007 Finisher Unit ...

Page 827: ...DZSD001829 11 88 Panasonic Software Operating Instructions Network Firmware Update Tool Service Tool Version 3 ...

Page 828: ...mware Code 6 4 Using the Network Firmware Update Tool 7 1st Edition 2002 March 20 2nd Edition 2002 August 1 3rd Edition 2002 December 5 4th Edition 2003 April 10 5th Edition 2003 April 22 6th Edition 2003 December 18 7th Edition 2004 April 7 8th Edition 2004 August 3 9th Edition 2004 August 20 10th Edition 2004 October 22 11th Edition 2005 March 18 Windows and Windows NT are registered trademark o...

Page 829: ...de Memory of the Unit directly Using a PC the firmware code is transferred to the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit through the LAN 1 1 Supporting OS This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS Windows 98 Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP 1 2 Supporting Panasonic Fax Copier Models Please refer to the service manual of each model ...

Page 830: ...es I want to and click Finish to restart your PC 2 2 Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool 1 Click the Start button on the Taskbar point to Programs Panasonic Panasonic Network Firmware Update then click Network Firmware Update Configuration 2 The Configuration dialog box appears General Tab Please change the settings if necessary File Selection Tab Auto Select Update Mode When you select th...

Page 831: ...le registry setting problems 1 Start Microsoft Windows For Windows NT 4 0 2000 XP logon to the computer network with an account that can add or change configurations i e Administrator 2 Click the Start button on the Taskbar point to Programs Panasonic Panasonic Firmware Update then click Uninstall Network Firmware Update Tool 3 Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall Remove the program...

Page 832: ...2 For other models 1 If the device password is changed Key Operator Password from the default value 0000 or 000 it is not possible to program the firmware code In this case enter the password in advance to the Default Password in the Configuration dialog box or enter the password at each communication As for three digit Key Operator Password device only 000 of the default value is judged 0000 in t...

Page 833: ...cation are set correctly 2 Make sure the remote unit is not in an operating condition Copying or Printing etc 3 Do not run other applications on this PC while it is transferring the firmware data to the remote unit or a communication error may occur 4 Do not operate or reset the power of the device while it is updating the firmware code or the firmware update isn t done properly and the device wil...

Page 834: ...Network Firmware Update Tool LAN Page 8 4 Enter the destination device s by using Manual Input or Device Address List Click OK 5 Confirm the destination device s Click Next ...

Page 835: ...File Folder Complete Set Step 6b1 If the archive file is already extracted into the local Data folder you can select the Parent File Folder directly here It is chosen as a set when the update of multiple firmware code files are necessary Select Independent File Folders Step 6c1 If the archive file is already extracted into the local Data folder you can select independent file folders here Note Fil...

Page 836: ... 10 6a2 Select the Firmware Archive file and click Open ex DP 2310_3010_PU_030228 exe 6a3 Extracting 6a4 Select the Firmware Type window appears Select the Firmware Type and click OK 6a5 Firmware Code File selection is completed Click Next ...

Page 837: ...ge 11 6b1 Select a Parent File Folder Complete Set Select Select a Parent File Folder Complete Set and click Browse button 6b2 Select the Parent File Folder and Click OK ex DP 2310_3010_PU_030228 6b3 Select the Firmware Type and click OK ...

Page 838: ...12 6b4 Firmware Code File selection is completed Click Next 6c1 Select Independent File Folders Select Select Independent File Folders and click Browse button 6c2 Select the Firmware Code File Folder and click OK ex SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU BIN ...

Page 839: ...rmware Update Tool LAN Page 13 6c3 Select the other Firmware Code File Folder and click OK 6c4 Firmware Code File selection is completed Click Next 7 The version check for the specified devices starts Click Next ...

Page 840: ...sent at once and then erase write and reboot This Send at once function cannot be used if the firmware type is PCL or PS and the unit SC version is V1 xxxx DP 3510 4510 6010 9 Confirm the destination device s again Set timer communication if necessary Then click Next 10 Data is transferred to the Spooler and the update is started The Spooler screen appears automatically showing the progress of the...

Page 841: ...s are completed all jobs in the spooler disappear and the communication log is displayed Click Finish to close the tool After each firmware code is successfully programmed to the Firmware Flash Memory in the unit the unit reboots and restarts again automatically ...

Page 842: ...memo ...

Page 843: ...DZSD000965 16 Panasonic Software Operating Instructions Local Firmware Update Tool Service Tool Version 3 ...

Page 844: ...ion 1999 February 10 2nd Edition 1999 September 30 3rd Edition 2000 September 8 4th Edition 2000 November 28 5th Edition 2001 June 20 6th Edition 2001 September 7 7th Edition 2003 April 10 8th Edition 2003 April 22 9th Edition 2003 December 18 10th Edition 2004 January 19 11th Edition 2004 February 10 12th Edition 2004 April 20 13th Edition 2004 August 3 14th Edition 2004 August 20 15th Edition 20...

Page 845: ...the firmware code is transferred to the Flash Memory Card or the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit through the Parallel USB Port on the Panasonic Fax Copy machine The installation and operation are very similar to the Printer Interface 1 1 Supporting OS This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS Windows 98 Me Windows NT 4 0 Parallel Port only Windows 2000 XP 1 2 S...

Page 846: ...e the Parallel cable or USB cable for connecting the Panasonic Fax Copy machine and your PC Important For the USB port models do not connect the USB cable yet 2 2 Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool 1 Start Microsoft Windows For Windows NT4 0 2000 XP log onto the computer network with an account that can add or change printer configurations i e Administrator Important For the USB port models...

Page 847: ... Searching Installing driver 3 When the install screen disappears the installation of the Firmware Update USB Driver is completed Note 1 The installation screens will vary and are dependant on the OS 2 For Windows 2000 or XP through the Digital Signature Not Found or Software Installation window will be displayed during the installation and indicate Unknown software package or not passed Windows L...

Page 848: ...ange configurations i e Administrator 2 Click the Start button on the Taskbar point to Programs Panasonic Panasonic Firmware Update then click Uninstall Local Firmware Update Tool 3 Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall Remove the program 4 The completion message is displayed when uninstall is completed Note The Firmware Update Driver is not deleted by the Uninstaller Please delete i...

Page 849: ... Code Please refer to the Service Manual to set the unit to Firmware Update Mode Service Mode 3 2 Preparing the Firmware Code Copy the firmware Code file s to the following folder C Panasonic Panasonic FUP Data Note The Archive File extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically into the designated folder ex DP 2310_PU_030327 exe ...

Page 850: ...oller are closed If they are running right click on the icons in the system tray and select Exit End Note About Windows 2000 XP using Network Firmware Update Tool the authority more than a Power User is required 3 From the Windows Desktop double click on the Local Firmware Update Tool shortcut icon to start the Panasonic Firmware Programming Wizard Click Next Note Please close all applications tha...

Page 851: ...b1 If the archive file is already extracted into the local Data folder you can select the Parent File Folder directly here It is chosen as a set when the update of multiple firmware code files are necessary Select an Independent File Step 5c1 If the archive file is already extracted into the local Data folder you can select an independent file here When updating multiple firmware files you must re...

Page 852: ...Local Firmware Update Tool Parallel USB Port Page 10 5a4 Select the Firmware Type window appears Select the Firmware Type and click OK 5a5 Firmware Code File selection is completed Click Next ...

Page 853: ...ort Page 11 5b1 Select a Parent File Folder Complete Set Select Select a Parent File Folder Complete Set and click Browse button 5b2 Select the Parent File Folder and Click OK ex DP 2310_3010_PU_030327 5b3 Select the Firmware Type and click OK ...

Page 854: ...Local Firmware Update Tool Parallel USB Port Page 12 5b4 Firmware Code File selection is completed Click Next ...

Page 855: ...SB Port Page 13 5c1 Select an Independent File Select Select an Independent File and click Browse button 5c2 Select the Firmware Code File and click Open ex SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU BIN 5c3 Firmware Code File selection is completed Click Next ...

Page 856: ...he unit is ready to receive the next firmware code file Note If you are updating the DP 2310 3010 the sending of sequential multiple files to the unit isn t done automatically The Waiting display on the PC will not advance to Executing until you set the unit back to USB Firmware Update on the machine to start receiving the next file See Unit information of the Firmware Update Mode on the next page...

Page 857: ...ceiving a firmware code file the unit does the delete and rewrite of the firmware code and will return to USB Firmware Update and continue the firmware update automatically When the last firmware code file AutoBoot is received the unit will re boot automatically and return to standby The unit doesn t boot automatically when you select an independent file The display returns to Update in Progress C...

Page 858: ...DZZSM00298 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for DP-3530

Brand: EBS Pages: 4

Brand: NCR Pages: 38

Document WorkCentre 480cx

Brand: Xerox Pages: 318

Brand: Xerox Pages: 76

Brand: Xerox Pages: 11

Brand: Xerox Pages: 352

Color 560 Printer

Brand: Xerox Pages: 2

Brand: Xerox Pages: 105

Brand: Xerox Pages: 42

Brand: Xerox Pages: 13

Brand: Xerox Pages: 132

CopyCentre C2128

Brand: Xerox Pages: 2

Brand: Xerox Pages: 20

Brand: Xerox Pages: 34

Brand: Xerox Pages: 8

Brand: Xerox Pages: 70

Brand: Xerox Pages: 124

Brand: Xerox Pages: 2

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands